236
LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    8

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

LG Programmable Logic Controller

Redundancy System

GMR-CPUAGMR-CPUB

User’s Manual

GLOFA-GM

LG Industrial Systems

Page 2: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read this manual thoroughly before using LGIS equipment. Also, pay

careful attention to safety and handle the module properly. Safety precautions are for using the product safely and correctly in order to

prevent the accidents and danger, so make sure to follow all directions in safety precautions.

The precautions are divided into 2 sections, ‘Warning’ and ‘Caution’. Each of the meaning is represented as follows

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

The symbols which are indicated in the PLC and User’s Manual mean as

follows;

This symbol means paying attention because of danger in specific situations.

This symbol means paying attention because of danger of electrical shock.

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it

whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

Warning

Caution

Page 3: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Design Precautions

Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire systemsafe even when there are problems with the external power supply orthe PLC module. Otherwise, serious trouble could result fromerroneous output or erroneous operation.

- Outside the PLC, construct mechanical damage preventing interlockcircuits such as emergency stop, protective circuits, positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward/reverse operation. When the PLC detects the following problems, it will stop calculation andturn off all output in the case of watchdog timer error, module interfaceerror, or other hardware errors. However, one or more outputs could be turned on when there areproblems that the PLC CPU cannot detect, such as malfunction of output device (relay, transistor, etc.) itself or I/O controller. Build a fail safecircuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operatessafely at such times. Also, build an external monitoring circuit that willmonitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble.

Make sure all external load connected to output does NOT exceed the rating of output module. Overcurrent exceeding the rating of output module could cause fire, damageor erroneous operation.

Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLCmain module power is turned on. If the external power supply is turned on first, it could result in erroneousoutput or erroneous operation.

Warning

Page 4: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Design Precautions

Installation Precautions

Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the maincircuit or power wires, or install them close to each other. They shouldbe installed 100mm (3.94inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation.

Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specificationcontained in this manual or datasheet. Using the PLC in an environment outside the range of the generalspecifications could result in electric shock, fire, erroneous operation, anddamage to or deterioration of the product.

Completely turn off the power supply before loading or unloading themodule. Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product.

Make sure all modules are loaded correctly and securely. Not doing so could cause a malfunction, failure or drop.

Make sure I/O and extension connector are installed correctly. Poor connection could cause an input or output failure.

When install the PLC in environment of much vibration, be sure toinsulate the PLC from direct vibration. Not doing so could cause electric shock, fire, and erroneous operation.

Be sure to there are no foreign substances such as conductive debrisinside the module. Conductive debris could cause fires, damage, or erroneous operation.

Caution

Caution

Page 5: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Wiring Precautions

Completely turn off the external power supply when installing orplacing wiring. Not doing so could cause electric shock or damage to the product.

Make sure that all terminal covers are correctly attached. Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock.

Be sure that wiring is done correctly be checking the product’s rated voltage and the terminal layout. Incorrect wiring could result in fire, damage, or erroneous operation.

Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque. If the terminal screws are loose, it could result in short circuits, fire, orerroneous operation.

Be sure to ground the FG or LG terminal to the protective groundconductor. Not doing so could result in erroneous operation.

Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiringdebris inside the module. Such debris could cause fire, damage, or erroneous operation.

Warning

Caution

Page 6: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Startup and Maintenance Precautions

Disposal Precaution

Do not touch the terminals while power is on. Doing so could cause electric shock or erroneous operation.

Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning themodule or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws. Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, short circuit, or solderthe battery. Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result ininjury and fires.

Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so could cause trouble, erroneous operation, injury, or fire.

Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting orremoving the module. Not doing so could cause failure or malfunction of the module.

Use a cellular phone or walky-talky more than 30cm (11.81 inch) awayfrom the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction.

When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. Not doing so could cause poisonous pollution or explosion.

Warning

Caution

Caution

Page 7: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Issue date Manual No. Revised Contents

2004.5.4 -

- FRIA/B is revised to FRIC

- The specification and output of G3Q-TR8A in chapter 5 is

revised (TR->FET)

• User’s Manual No. is inscribed on the right bottom side of the back cover.

Revision History

Page 8: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 1. Introduction 1-1~1-4

1.1 How to Use This Manual 1-1

1.2 Precautions 1-2

1.3 Definition of Terms 1-3

Chapter 2. System Characteristics 2-1~2-2

2.1 Characteristics of Redundant Structure 2-1

2.2 Characteristics of CPU Module 2-2

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction 3-1~3-7

3.1 Redundant CPU System 3-1

3.2 Redundant Input/Output System 3-2

3.2.1 Switched Input/Output 3-2

3.2.2 Redundant Input/Output(I/O Redundant) 3-3

3.2.3 One-sided Input/Output 3-4

3.3 Basic I/O System 3-5

3.3.1 Program I/O Address Designation 3-6

3.3.2 Using Special Module 3-7

3.3.3 Using Communication Module 3-7

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table 4-1~4-5

4.1 Configuration 4-1

4.2 Configuration Equipment 4-2

INDEX

Page 9: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications 5-1~5-39

5.1 General Specifications 5-15.2 Redundant Module Specifications 5-2

5.2.1 CPU Module Specifications (GMR-CPUA/GMR-CPUB) 5-2

5.2.2 Each Part Name of CPU Module 5-4

5.2.3 Battery Specifications 5-6

5.2.4 Redundant Interface Module Specifications(GMR-DIFA) 5-7

5.2.5 CPU Redundant Base Specifications (GMR-B02M, GMR-B04M) 5-8

5.2.6 Extended Base Specifications 5-9

5.2.7 Power Redundant Module Specifications 5-10

5.3 Power Module 5-115.3.1 Performance Specifications 5-11

5.3.2 Power Module Selection 5-12

5.3.3 Each Part Name 5-13

5.4 I/O Module Operation Specifications 5-145.4.1 Operation Specifications of basic system 5-14

5.5 I/O Module 5-1 5

5.5.1 Precautions when selecting I/O Module 5-15

5.6 I/O Module Specifications 5-165.6.1 I/O Module Performance Specifications 5-16

5.6.2 Output Module Specifications 5-24

5.6.3 Interrupt Input Module Specifications 5-33

5.7 Interface Module Specifications 5-345.7.1 Remote Interface Module Specifications 5-34

5.7.2 Remote Interface Module Configuration 5-34

5.7.3 Termination Resistance 5-37

5.7.4 Cable Specifications 5-37

5.7.5 How to install Remoter Interface Module 5-38

Chapter 6. Operation Mode 6-1~6-5

6.1 Types of Operation Mode 6-16.2 Program Run Mode 6-1

Page 10: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

6.2.1 RUN Mode 6-1

6.2.2 STOP Mode 6-2

6.2.3 DEBUG Mode 6-2

6.2.4 How to Change Program Operation Mode 6-3

6.3 Redundant System Operation Mode 6-46.3.1 Redundant Operation Mode 6-4

6.3.2 Redundant Operation Mode Change 6-4

6.3.3 Master Changeover during Redundant Operation 6-5

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program 7-1~7-18

7.1 Program Running Structure 7-17.2 Program Operation 7-2

7.2.1 Program Types 7-2

7.2.2 How to Run Program 7-2

7.2.3 Program Flow Chart 7-3

7.2.4 Synchronization method during redundant operation 7-4

7.3 Restart Mode 7-67.3.1 Cold restar t 7-6

7.3.2 Warm restart 7-6

7.3.3 Hot restart 7-6

7.3.4 Data Initialization according to Restart Mode 7-7

7.3.5 Restart Mode Application according to Operation Purpose 7-8

7.3.6 Operation Type in each Restart Mode 7-8

7.4 Task Program 7-107.4.1 Kind of Task 7-10

7.4.2 Processing of Task Program 7-10

7.4.3 Processing of Positive period Task Program 7-11

7.4.4 Processing of Outside Contact Task Program 7-12

7.4.5 Processing of Inside Contact Task Program 7-13

7.4.6 Verification of Task Program 7-13

7.4.7 Example of Program Configuration and Processing 7-15

Page 11: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

7.5 Timer/Counter 7-15

7.5.1 Timer 7-15

7.5.2 Counter 7-17

Chapter 8. Program Operation 8-1~8-19

8.1 System Operation 8-18.1.1 Program Preparation 8-1

8.1.2 Operation Method 8-1

8.1.3 Initial Operation 8-1

8.1.4 Operation Participation 8-2

8.1.5 Operation Condition 8-3

8.2 I/O Forced ON/OFF 8-38.2.1 Forced ON/OFF Setting 8-3

8.2.2 Forced ON/OFF Processing Time and Method 8-4

8.3 Immediate I/O 8-58.3.1 Immediate Input 8-5

8.3.2 Immediate Output 8-5

8.3.3 Forced ON/OFF 8-5

8.4 Memory Structure 8-58.4.1 Program Memory Structure 8-5

8.4.2 Data Memory Structure 8-6

8.4.3 Resource Global Variable Processing 8-78.5 Scan Time 8-

8 8.5.1 Scan Time Calculation 8-8

8.5.2 Scan Watchdog Timer 8-9

8.5.3 Delay Time in Redundant Operation 8-10

8.6 RTC : Real Time Clock 8-108.6.1 RTC Internal Data 8-10

8.6.2 RTC Time Error 8-118.7 Precautions when using special module 8-1 1

8.7.1 Special Module Programming 8-11

8.7.2 Special Module Initialization 8-12

Page 12: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

8.7.3 Special Module Control 8-12

8.7.4 Module Replacement During Operation 8-128.8 How to Use Memory Module 8-1 3

8.8.1 How to Write User’s Program in Memory Module 8-13

8.8.2 How to operate using Memory Module 8-148.9 Flag For displaying outside fault 8-1 5

8.9.1 Detect and Classification of Outside Fault 8-15

8.9.2 Heavy Fault of Outside Equipment 8-15

8.9.3 Light fault of Outside Equipment 8-16

8.10 Operation in Instantaneous Power Failure 8-178.10.1 Instantaneous Power Failure less than Permissible 20ms 8-17

8.10.2 Instantaneous Power Failure Exceeding Permissible 20ms 8-17

8.10.3 Instantaneous Power Failure During Redundant Operation 8-188.11 History Log-In 8-1 9

8.11.1 History Log-in and Content 8-19

8.11.2 Reset of Saved Information 8-19

Chapter 9. Error Remedy 9-1~9-10

9.1 Usage and Operation of Fault Mask 9-19.1.1 Usage and Operation of Fault Mask 9-1

9.1.2 How to Set Fault Mask 9-1

9.1.3 By Flag 9-1

9.1.4 By Parameter 9-1

9.2 I/O Skip(I/O Module, Extended Base Operation Miss Designated) 9-29.2.1 Usage and Operation of I/O Skip 9-2

9.2.2 I/O Skip Setting and I/O Data Processing 9-2

9.2.3 Application to Redundant System 9-2

9.3 Module Replacement During Operation 9-39.3.1 General of Module Replacement During Operation 9-3

9.3.2 Replacement of CPU redundancy 9-3

9.3.3 Replacement of Switched Bass 9-4

Page 13: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

9.3.4 Replacement of Redundant Bass 9-6

9.4 Error Remedy 9-8

9.4.1 Segment of Errors 9-8

9.4.2 Standard Error Remedy 9-8

9.4.3 How to change by users 9-8

9.4.4 Detailed Error Task 9-9

9.4.5 Example of Error Task 9-10

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy 10-1~10-13

10.1 Principle 10-1

10.1.1 Triplexing of Digital Input 10-1

10.1.2 Redundancy of Digital Output 10-2

10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module 10-3

10.1.4 Parameter Setting 10-4

10.2 I/O Processing Procedures and Method 10-410.2.1 I/O Processing Procedures 10-4

10.2.2 Detailed Input Data Processing 10-5

10.2.3 Ex. Of Input Data Processing 10-6

10.2.4 Detailed Output Data Processing 10-10

10.2.5 Ex. Of Output Data Processing 10-11

Chapter 11. Flag Table 11-1~11-24

11.1 User Flag 11-1

11.2 System Error Flag 11-2

11.3 System Fault Mask Flag 11-5

11.4 System Warning Flag 11-7

11.5 System Error and Warning Details Flag 11-

Page 14: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

9 11.6 System Operation Status Information Flag 11-1 411.7 System Configuration Status Information Flag 11-1711.8 Communication Flag 11-1 911.9 Access Pass Registration of Flag 11-2 2

Chapter 12. System Definition 12-1~12-7

12.1 Basic Parameter 12-1

12.2 I/O Configuration Parameter 12-312.3 Communication Parameter 12-512.4 Redundant Parameter 12-

6

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting 13-1~13-5

13.1 Front Display 13-1

13.2 Troubleshooting 13-3

Chapter 14. Installation and Wring 14-1~14-13

14.1 Installation 14-1

14.1.1 Installation Environment 14-1

14.1.2 Precautions 14-3

14.1.3 Removal of Module 14-614.2 Wiring 14-

8 14.2.1 Power Wiring 14-8

14.2.2 I/O Device Wiring 14-10

14.2.3 Earth Wiring 14-10

14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification 14-12

Page 15: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

14.3 Trial Operation 14-1 3

14.3.1 Checkpoint before Trial 14-13

14.3.2 Trial Procedures 14-13

Chapter 15. Maintenance 15-1~15-4

15.1 Maintenance and Check 15-1

15.2 Daily Check 15-1

15.3 Regular Check 15-2

15.4 Replacement of Module 15-2

15.5 Replacement of Battery 15-3

15.6 Replacement of Fuse 15-4

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting 16-1~16-13

16.1 Principle of Troubleshooting 16-1

16.2 Troubleshooting 16-1

16.2.1 Flow if Power LED extinguished 16-2

16.2.2 Remedy if Fail LED illumination 16-3

16.2.3 Remedy if 7-SEG code display S 16-3

16.2.4 Remedy if 7-SEG code display E 16-4

16.2.5 Output Module Operates Abnormally 16-5

16.2.6 Remedy if communication not connected properly 16-6

16.2.7 Remedy of Interface Module Trouble 16-7

16.3 Troubleshooting Question Sheet 16-816.4 Each Example 16-

9 16.4.1 Trouble Type and Remedy of Input Circuit 16-9

Page 16: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

16.4.2 Trouble Type and Remedy of Output Circuit 16-10

Chapter 17. Troubleshooting 17-1~17-6

17.1 Outside Dimension(Unit : mm) 17-117.1.1 Redundant Interface Module 17-1

17.1.2 Remote Interface Module 17-2

17.1.3 Redundant Base 17-3

17.1.4 Power Module 17-5

17.1.5 Extension Cable 17-6

17.1.6 Memory Module 17-6

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System A1-1~A1-13

A1.1 System Block Diagram A1-1

A1.2 Function Setting by Module A1-2

A1.3 Function setting by Contact A1-3

A1.4 Project A1-4

A1.5 Ex. Of Program A1-5

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table A2-1~A2-6

A2.1 Basic Function Table A2-1

A2.2 Basic Function Block Table A2-3

A2.3 Function Block for Communication Module A2-3A2.4 Function Block for Special Module A2-4

A2.4.1 Function Block in One-side Operation(Attached at Switched Base) A2-4

A2.4.2 Function Block in Redundant Operation(Attached at Redundant Base) A2-4

Page 17: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

A2.4.3 Function Block when installed at Remote(Installed at Remote Base) A2-4A2.5 Immediate I/O Function Block A2-

5

Appendix 3. I/O Contact/Variable Definition Table A3-1~A3-4

Page 18: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 1. Introduction

1-1

Chapter 1. Introduction

1.1 How to Use This Manual This User’s Manual describes the performance specification and operation of GLOFA redundant system including GMR-CPUA. It also describes some communication structure and redundant use of special module, and etc. This manual provides the specification of CPU module, Power Module, Input/Output Module, Basic/Extended Base, Interface Module, and Interrupt Module applied to base system and refers to the following items and user’s manuals. CPU Module: GMR−CPUA, GMR−CPUB Redundant Interface Module: GMR−DIFA Power Module : GM3−PAA, GM1−PAA, GMR−PAA, GMR−PAB Input/Output Module: G3I−, G3Q− Redundant Basic Base : GMR-B 0 M Extended Base : GMR−B E Power Redundant Remote Base: GM3−B08R, GM3-B08S Interface Module: GM2−FDIA, GM2−FRIC Interrupt Module: G3F−INTA Refers to the following user’s manuals to make program. GLOFA PLC GMR Redundant System User’s Manual GLOFA PLC Instruction Glossary GLOFA PLC GMWIN User’s Manual For detailed special and communication module, refer to the related user’s manual and technical data. User’s Manual of each special module User’s Manual of each communication module Communication Redundant Technical Data

Page 19: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 1. Introduction

1-2

1.2 Precautions Take precautions to the followings for reliability and safety of system when installing this machine.

Item Section Description

Condition When installing this machine, keep the ambient temperature between

0 and 55°C concerning the temperature of an element. Don’t expose directly to sun. Temperature

Remedy In high temperature, install fan and air conditioner but install heater to keep proper temperature, if low,

Condition Don’t form dew due to rapid temperature change. Install it in the control panel enabled for waterproof and dustproof.

Dewdrop

Remedy Frequent Power On/Off may cause dewdrop due to changed temperature. In this case, power on at night.

Condition Install in which there is no impulse or vibration.

Impulse Remedy

In case of serious impulse or vibration, take actions to prevent vibration such as vibroisolating rubber.

Condition Install in which there is no corrosion gas. Gas

Remedy If entering outside gas, take remedy for air purification of control panel at which the machine installed.

Condition Install in which suitable for electro magnetic field.

E.M.C Environment Remedy

Select accurate path of wiring. Make sure the shield installed properly in control panel. For lighting of control panel, avoid a fluorescent light and use an

incandescent electric light. When installing Power Module, ground it on base potential.

Page 20: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 1. Introduction

1-3

1.3 Definition of Terms

Sect. Terms Definition

1 Module Standalone part and mounted on baseboard and etc. (CPU Module, Power Module, Input/Output Module, Special Module, Communication Module, and etc.)

2 Unit Each module combined into opera table system (Basic Unit, Extended Unit.

3 PLC System Fully equipped with component for PLC operation and controllable by user’s program.

4 Restart mode When PLC system restarted, start type of user’s program. Consists of Cold, Warm, and Hot Mode.

5 Interrupt During normal program, the condition which should take precedence over the others. Interrupt running program and proceed to it in advance.

6 Task Movement condition of program. Consists of Scan Task, Interval Task, Internal Contact(Single) Task and Outside Contact(Interrupt) Task by Input Contact of interrupt module.

7 Task Program When task occurred, the program of which movement condition set to Task enables to match with it.

8 Initialization Program When starting in Cold, Warm or Hot Restart mode, used to set system defaults prior to task program running or run scan and task programs after the object could be controlled.

9 Scan Program The program not designated to Initialization or Task Program among user’s program, e.g. the program run repeatedly in sequence without movement condition designated.

10 Input/Output Image Space

Memory space in PLC having input module contacts to be output and contacts to be output as a result of processing.

11 Instruction, operation unit

Program operation unit; general term of operator, function and function block such as LD(LOAD),AND,OR,ST(STORE).

12 FN:Function Operation unit immediately output the result of operation without memorizing it in memory such as +/-/x/ ÷ operation and comparative operation. Also called Function.

13 FB:Function block Operation unit with the result of operation in memory and used over several scans. Also called Function Block.

14 Direct Variable Variable without Name, type designated separately and corresponds to I, Q, M area. (%IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, %MD1234, and etc.)

Page 21: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 1. Introduction

1-4

Sect. Terms Definition

15 Symbolic variable

Variable with Name and Type designated by users. If designated as ‘INPUT_0’= %IX0.0.2, ‘RESULT’= %MD123, and etc., programmable with the name of 'INPUT_0' and ‘RESULT’ instead of %IX0.0.2 and %MD1234.

16 Auto variable

While symbolic variable declares directly the correspondent memory space in variable designating (see 15), this makes GMWIN assign the area automatically only with name and type designated. If declaring ‘INPUT_0’= BOOL, ‘RESULT’= DWORD, programmable with the name of 'INPUT_0' and ‘RESULT’ and assigned with the position of memory automatically.

17 Instance memory

If declaring the name of function block(instance name) when Function Block used, the result of operation is memorized in memory with its name. This time, memory area(set automatically in GMWIN) is called Instance memory.

18 Local variable Variable valid only in one program block or function block. Used to declare the program of respective block and to program it. Disabled ‘Read’ and ‘Write’ in other blocks.

19 Resource global variable

Variable sharable between programs; symbolic variable declared as Direct and Resource global variables. These have one memory physically. Direct variable can be used directly in each program and symbolic one is available after declaring it as ‘VAR-EXTERNAL’ with the same name in respective programming.

20 Configuration global variable

Variable sharable between resources, e.g. between CPU in multi-CPU system; symbolic variable declared as configuration global. These have one memory on coordinator module physically. Available after declaring symbolic variable with same name as ‘VER-EXTERNAL’ in respective programming (Disavailable in Redundant System).

21 GMWIN General Purpose Computer built-in programming software available in programming of GLOFA PLC series, editing, compiling, and debugging.

22 Highway Link Communication method in high speed and periodically between PLC Hardware and Remote I/O, PLC and PLC, and PLC and computer through GLOFA PLC Communication network (Enet, Fnet, and etc.).

23 FMM Module (Fnet Master Module)

Communication module mounted on basic base in communication system using Fnet(Fieldbus network) (Ex.: G3L-FUEA, G3L-FUOA)

24 FSM Module (Fnet Slave Module)

Communication module mounted on remote base in remote input/output system using Fnet(Fieldbus network) (Ex.: G3L-RBEA, G3L-RBOA)

25 FAM A series of PC built-in software for process monitoring and controlling.

Page 22: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 2. System Characteristics

2-1

Chapter 2 System Characteristics

2.1 Characteristics of Redundant Structure This section provides how to establish redundant system in several types required by various application fields. (1) Perfect Redundant System

• GLOFA Redundant system provides perfect function through redundancy of CPU Module, Power Module, Input/Output Module and network. • Users can establish redundancy of CPU System, Input/Output, and Network selectively

(2) Redundant Function of CPU System

• If a failure of master CPU during parallel operation of two CPU, stand-by CPU continues to operate as a master without interrupts. • Since two CPU operate the same program simultaneously, there is no delay when transferring to stand-by due to a failure of master. • When restoring the operation of stand-by CPU, high-speed processing with control scan delay time within 50ms.

(3) Redundancy of Input/Output System 1

• Good reliability and troubleshooting by three-way input. • Prevents load operation stopped due to a failure of output by redundant output. • Fault Detecting and Auto Interrupt of load power by output feedback.

(4) Redundant of Communication System

• Establishes redundant network with higher computer. • Establishes redundant network between remote I/O and PLC. • Allows dual cable of remote system to be installed.

(5) Redundancy of Power Module

• Provides redundant power to remote base connected to Input/Output Extended Base and network besides Basic Redundant Base with CPU Module mounted.

Page 23: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 2. System Characteristics

2-2

2.2 Characteristics of CPU Module GLOFA PLC Series have characteristics as follows.

Selects International Specification communication protocol suitable for CIM Easy programming tool support Realizes highway process with built-in operation dedicated microprocessor Provides International Specification language Holds various special equipment Supports software package for powerful FA Supports monitoring device

GMR−CPUA/GMR-CPUB is CPU module having characteristics as follows.

(1) Highway Processing

Realizes highway processing of 0.12µs/Step with built-in operation dedicated microprocessor.

(2) Reinforced Self Test

Subdivides into detailed error code by contents and makes the probable cause of error founded easily.

(3) Restart Mode Setting

Makes users set Cold, Warm, and Hot Restart mode according to its environment. Especially in case of Hot Restart, enables users to control exact process with allowable time setting.

(4) Debug Operation

In PLC Operation Mode, enables on-line program debugging in DEBUG Mode. Debugging functions as follows.

Running one instruction one time. Running according to Break Point designation Running according to device status (Read, Write, Value) Running according to designated scan number

(5) Various Programming

Enables users to set various programming according to the condition such as Interrupt, Outside Interrupt, and Inside Contact Interrupt Program besides Scan Program.

(6) Enables long data type (64Bit) and real number operation.

Page 24: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-1

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.1 Redundant CPU System Redundant CPU system can be realized through connecting two CPU systems to redundant base as shown in the following figure. That is to say, if an error of master occurred during operation, GMR-B automatically becomes master and continues operation. After a failure of GMR-A recovered, user can switch the master to GMR-A using program tool and key switch.

[Fig. 3.1] Slot of Redundant Basic Base

CPU-A, B : GMR-CPUA or GMR-CPUB Module POWER : Power Module(Using GMR-PA1A/PA2A, GM1-PA1A/PA2A) I/F : Communication Module(G3L-FUEA, G3L-EUEA, G3L-CUEA and etc.) or Long Distance Interface Module DIF : Interface Module between CPU Base : GMR-B02M, GMR-B04M(Extended)

* Enables Distributed Control System to be configured with Communication Module mounted at I/F Module mounting place. * In Redundant Base, Redundant CPU is located at left and right with the center of DIF Module. (Both of CPU O/S versions should be the same.) It should have the same kinds of module at position 0, 1, 2 and 3 of GMR-A and position 0, 1, 2 and 3 of GMR-B as shown in [Fig. 3.1]. In other words , If G3L-EUEA(Enet) module mounted at slot 0 of GMR-A, G3L-EUEA(Enet) module should be also mounted at slot 0 of GMR-B.

POWER

I/F

(Redundant Basic Base)

(Extended Redundant Basic Base)

0 1GMR-BGMR-A

01

GMR-A GMR-B

I/F

CPU

A

I/F

I/F

POWER

CPU

B

DIF

POWER

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

CPU

A

CPU

B

DIF

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

POWER

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3

Page 25: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-2

3.2 Redundant Input/Output System Input/Output depends on user’s selection and can be used as Redundant I/O, Switched I/O, One-sided I/O, and its combination according to parameter setting.

3.2.1 Switched Input/Output CPU-A and CPU-B operates simultaneously with the same program and data synchronized when data synchronization required. If master stopped operation due to a failure of CPU, stand-by CPU takes over the operation immediately and this time switched input/output enables continuous operation without change of state.

In this structure, it called CPU redundant because no redundant Input/Output established. Set each base to ‘Switched Input/Output’ at parameter setting. Stand-by CPU checks switched base for connection periodically.

P WR

I / F

I / F

C P U A

DIF

CPUB

I/F

I/F

PWR

P WR

P WR

I / O

I / O

I / O

I / O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/F

I/F

Redundant Basic Base

Switched Input/Output

Connected to next switchedbase Load

Sensor

[Fig. 3.2] Example of Switched Input/Output

Page 26: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-3

3.2.2 Redundant Input/Output(I/O Redundant) CPU-A and CPU-B operates simultaneously with the same program and data synchronized when data synchronization required. If master stopped operation due to a failure of CPU, stand-by CPU takes over the operation immediately and this time I/O connected to master turns OFF among Redundant I/O setting bases.

In this structure, both of master and stand-by CPU control I/O module and use the same value more than 2 among 3 as input data, compared with Redundant I/O A, Redundant I/O B and Switched I/O.

In GMWIN, set each base to ‘Redundant I/O’ and both base number setting switch to the same value. Also set the position of Switched I/O for input comparison and output feedback.

[Fig. 3.3] Example of Redundant I/O Base

POWER

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

CPUA

CPUB

DIF

POWER

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/F

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

중복 입출력 A Switc I/O

Redun. Base

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

중복 입출력 B

센서

부 하

다음 베이스 연결 다음 베이스 연결 다음 베이스 연결

Redundant Input/ Output A Redundant Input/Output B

Connected to next base Connected to next base Connected to next base

Load

Sensor

Page 27: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-4

3.2.3 One-sided Input/Output CPU-A and CPU-B operates simultaneously with the same program and data synchronized when data synchronization required. If CPU-A stopped operation due to a failure of CPU, attached I/O stops the operation and the output connected to it turns OFF. Set each base to ‘One-sided I/O’ and this structure is used when no backup required, saving costs of entire redundancy.

Remarks

• One-sided I/O shall be installed only at CPU-A. • One-sided I/O can be installed with only Digital Contact I/O Module.

The following shows the example of Redundant I/O, Switched I/O, One-sided I/O, and combined structure. ‘Switched I/O #1’ is used for switched I/O and ‘switched I/O #2’ for Redundant I/O.

POWER

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

CPUA

CPUB

DIF

POWER

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/F

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/F

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

POWER

I/F

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

I/0

Redundant I/ORedundant I/O

One-sided I/O

Switched I/O #2

Switched I/O #1

Redundant Base

[Fig. 3.4] Example Combined with Switched, Redundant, and One-sided I/O

Page 28: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-5

3.3 Basic I/O System

This connects Switched Base Unit and Redundant Base Unit to CPU Redundant Unit using Extended Cable.

중복입출력베이스(B)#3

증설 베이스 8 슬롯

I/F

x 32x 16x 8x 4x 2x 1

베이스 번호

전환입출력베이스#1

POWER

SLOT

HSC

I/O

RTD

0 1 32 4 5 76

I/F

POWER

전환입출력베이스#2

POWER

I/O

I/F

POWER

CPUA

이중화기본베이스#0

1 2 3 0 1

DIF

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

CPUB

I/F

I/F

I/F

0 2 3

POWER

중복입출력베이스(A)#3

중복입출력베이스(B)#4

중복입출력베이스(A)#4

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

SLOT 0 1 32 4 5 76

POWER

HSC

I/O

RTD

I/F

POWER

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/F

SLOT 0 1 32 4 5 76

SLOT 0 1 32 4 5 76

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

POWER

I/O

I/F

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

POWER

I/O

I/F

SLOT 0 1 32 4 5 76

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

SLOT 0 1 32 4 5 76

POWER

I/O

I/F

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

[Fig. 3.5 GMR−CPUA] I/O System Structure of GMR Redundant System

1) System Structure (1) Max. Base Number: 16(Base No.: #0~#15) (2) Max. I/O Module Mounting Number: 120 Modules (3) Max. I/O Point Number: 7,680 Points (When using 8 Slot Base/64 Points Module)

2) Install Distance

Entire extended distance of extended cable shall be within the specification of long distance interface module.

3) Assignment of I/O Number

• I/O number is assigned with Redundant Basic Base set to ‘0’ and the other extended bases set in accordance with Dip switch (mounted at Interface Module) of Extended Unit, from left of each base.

• 12-slot type base is assigned with two base numbers and base number set using Dip Switch shall be even number.

Redundant Basic I/O #0

Switched Base I/O #1

Switched Base I/O #2

Redundant Base I/O(A) #3

Redundant Base I/O(A) #4

Redunda-nt Base I/O(A) #3

Redunda-nt Base I/O(A) #4

Base No

Page 29: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-6

3.3.1 Program I/O Address Designation (1) Operation will be started when I/O Module type setting parameter(I/O Parameter) matched with actually mounted module type.

(2) Each slot of base will be assigned at 64 points from left regardless of the mounting and type of module.

(3) I/O Contacts Designation Actual Contacts correspond to Program Contacts as follows.

Input: %IX 0. 0. 0 Output: %QX 0. 1. 15 Indicates Contact Number of I/O Module between 0 and 63. Indicates the number of slot at which I/O module mounted between 0 and 7. Indicates the number of base between 0 and 15 with basic base 0. (4) 12-slot base consists of

(5) Redundant Basic Base can be mounted with interface and communication modules and slot number starts from left at both A and B.

Remarks

• Corresponding two contacts of Redundant Base have the same address. • It is regarded as one contact in programming.

(6) Example of I/O Number Assignment

I/O Number Assignment if I/O Module mounted at No. 2 Base Dash line indicates if 12-slot base used.

Slot Number: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3

P W R

I N 16

%QX 2.7.0 ~ 63%QX 2.6.0 ~ 31%QX 2.5.0 ~ 31%QX 2.4.0 ~ 15%IX 2.3.0 ~ 63 %IX 2.2.0 ~ 31 %IX 2.1.0 ~ 15 %IX 2.0.0 ~ 15

I N 16

I N 32

I N 64

OUT16

OUT32

OUT32

OUT64

I N32

O U T 32

I / F

OUT16

OUT 32

%QX 3.3.0 ~ 31%QX 3.2.0 ~ 31%QX 3.1.0 ~ 15%IX 3.0.0 ~ 31

Page 30: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3-7

Remarks • Basic Base is assigned with Redundant Basic Base set to ‘0’ and the other extended bases set in accordance with Dip switch (mounted at Interface Module) of Extended Unit. • Never assign the same base number in Dip Switch Setting of Extended Base. • 12-slot extended base is assigned with two base numbers. Dip Switch shall be even number. (If setting to No. 2, No. 2 and 3 bases will be occupied.) • If 4-slot, 6-slot, and 12-slot type bases used, the total number of mounting module will be decreased.

3.3.2 Using Special Module

When using special module, there is no restriction for mounting position and used number of module. Special Module is assigned with I/O Contact but not used in the program. Special Module controls each module using dedicated function block and instance memory is assigned automatically as function block used. When establishing redundant special module, must use Special Rfb for redundancy.

3.3.3 Using Communication Module (1) Ethernet, field bus module, and etc. can be mounted up to 4 only at basic base. (2) Cnet I/F module can be mounted up to 8 between 0 and 3 slot of basic base and the 1st extended switch base(Impossible to be mounted at 12-slot base). (3) Highway link can operate with up to 4 modules designated.

Page 31: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

4-1

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table This chapter describes the configuration of GLOFA GMR series.

4.1 Configuration Stand-alone GLOFA GMR series consists of as shown in the following figure.

Battery Cable Diskette

Memory module

Redundant I/F module

Communi -cation module

Power module

FuseBasic base

Extended base

Extended base

Input module

Output module

Spec ial module

Communication module

Switched I/O Redundant I/O

Page 32: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

4-2

4.2 Configuration Equipment Configuration equipment of GLOFA GMR series is as follows.

[Table 4.1] Configuration Equipment Table Item Name Config.name Description Remarks

GMR-CPUA Max. I/O

(Direct:7,680points,Remote:32,000 points)

CPU Module

GMR-CPUB Program (CPUA: 512K byte, CPUB: 2M byte)

Memory Module G2M-M512 Capacity : 512k Step (2048k byte)

Redundant I/F Module GMR-DIFA Used for GMR CPU Redundant

configuration

G3I-D22A DC12/24V Input 16 points

G3I-D22C DC12/24V Stand-alone COM Input 16 points

G3I-D24A DC12/24V Input 32 points

G3I-D28A DC12/24V Input 64 points

G3I-A12A AC110V Input 16 points

G3I-A14A AC110V Input 32 points

G3I-A22A AC220V Input 16 points

G3I-A24A AC220V Input 32 points

G3Q-RY2A Relay Output 16 points

G3Q-RY4A Relay Output 32 points

G3Q-TR2A TR Output 16 points

G3Q-TR4A TR Output 32 points (Sink)

G3Q-TR4B TR Output 32 points (Source)

G3Q-TR8A TR Output 64 points (Sink)

G3Q-TR8B TR Output 64 points (Source)

G3Q-SS2A SSR Output 16 points

I/O Module

G3Q-SS4A SSR Output 32 points

GMR-B02M Basic Base 2 Slot Redundant Basic Base

GMR-B04M Basic Base 4 Slot

GMR-B08E Extended Base for Switched I/O, 8 Slot Switched I/O GMR-B12E Extended Base for Switched I/O, 12 Slot

GM2-B06E Extended Base for Redundant I/O, 6 Slot

GM2-B08E Extended Base for Redundant I/O, 8 Slot

Extended Base Redundant

I/O GM2-B12E Extended Base for Redundant I/O, 12 Slot

Page 33: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

4-3

Item Name Config.name Description Remarks

Basic GM3-B08R Remote Basic Base for Power redundancy, 8 slot Remote

Base for Power redundancy

Extended GM3-B08S Remote Extended Base for Power redundancy, 8 slot

Driver Module GM2-FDIA Mounted at Basic Base

Max. Used Distance : 100m

GM2-FRIA Mounted at Extended Base

(for 4/6/8 slot base)

Direct Extended Interface Module

Receiver Module

GM2-FRIC Mounted at Extended Base

(for 4/6/8/12 slot base)

GMR-PA1A AC110V

GMR-PA2A DC5V : 12A

AC220V

GMR-PA1B AC110V

GMR-PA2B DC5V : 6A, DC24V : 1.5A

AC220V

GM1-PA1A AC110V

GM1-PA2A DC5V : 12A

AC220V

GM3-PA1A AC110V

GM3-PA2A DC5V : 6A, DC24V : 1.5A

AC220V

G3F-PA1A AC110V

Power Module

G3F-PA2A +15V : 2A -15V : 1.2A AC220V

G2C-E031 Length 0.3m G2C-E061 Length 0.6m G2C-E121 Length 1.2m G2C-E401 Length 4.0m

Cable type can be added if required by users(see catalogue).

Extended Cable

G2C-E Customized (10m unit, up to 100m)

G3F-AD4A Voltage/Current Input, 16-channel (DC-5 ~ +5V/-10V, DC-20 ~ +20mA)

G3F-AD4B Voltage/Current Input, 16-channel (DC1 ~ 5V, DC 4 ~ 20mA)

A/D Conversion

Module

G3F-AD3A Voltage/Current Input, 8-channel (DC1 ~ 5V/0 ~ 10V, DC 4 ~ 20mA)

G3F-DA4V Voltage Output, 16 channel, DC -5 ~ +5V/-10 ~ +10V

G3F-DA4I Current Output, 16 Channel, DC 4 ~ 20Ma

G3F-DA3V Voltage Output, 8 channel, DC 0 ~ +10V

Special Module

D/A Conversion

Module

G3F-DA3I Current Output, 8 Channel, DC 4 ~ 20mA

Special Module Exter- nal power supply

Page 34: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

4-4

Item Name Config.name Description Remarks

G3F-TC4A Thermocouple Input of 16 channel Input : K, J, E, T, B, R, S Cold Contact Auto Compensation

Temp.

Conversion Module

G3F-RD3A

8-channel temperature measuring resistor input(3 line type) Measuring Temperature : −200 ~ 600°C Detecting of short

PID control module G3F-PIDA/B Max. 32 Loop Control

Static/Dynamic operation conversion

Analogue timer module

G3F-AT4A 16-point analogue timer On-Delay operation

Special Module

Highway counter module

G3F-HSCA 2 channel 1/2/4 multiplying 24 bit(0~16,777,215) counting range

G3L-FUEA

Fieldbus specification standard 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Available for GM 1/2/3 series

G3L-FUOA Fieldbus specification standard 1Mbps Base Band(Optical Cable Used) Available for GM 1/2/3 series

G0L-FUEA

Fieldbus specification standard 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Available for IBM PC compatible series

G3L-RBEA

Fieldbus specification standard 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Available for GM3 Basic base series

G3L-RBOA Fieldbus specification standard 1Mbps Base Band(Optical Cable Used) Available for GM3 Basic base series

Communication Module

Fnet I/F Module

G0L-SMQA

Fieldbus specification standard 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Stand-alone Remote(Relay Output 16

point)

Page 35: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

4-5

Item Name Config.name Description Remarks

G0L-FREA

Fieldbus Specification based Repeater 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Available for max. 6 units connection

G0L-FOEA

Fieldbus Specification based E.O.C(Optic ↔ Electric Converter) 1Mbps Base Band Available for max. 6 units connection

G0L-FAPA G0L-FABA G0L-FACA

Fieldbus Specification based Active Coupler (Optical Signal Divider) 1Mbps Base Band Max. 8 modules connection(per one unit)

G3L-FURA

Fieldbus Specification Standard 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Available for GM1/2/3 series Provides Network/Cable redundancy to

Communication Redundant Master Station

Fnet I/F Module

G3L-RBRA

Fieldbus Specification Standard 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable

Used) Available for GM3 basic base series Provides Network/Cable redundancy to

Communication Redundant Slave Station Provides Power Redundant Function

Cnet I/F Module G3L-CUEA

User-defined communication enabled with the other equipment PC connection with built-in Protocol Modem/Dedicated Modem communication

Communication Module

Enet I/F Module G3L-EUEA

User-defined communication enabled with the other Ethernet equipment (Max. one channel) Dedicated communication with PC and

MMI(Max. 16 channels) Highway Link Communication/FB

Communication 10 Base 2, 10 Base 5, 10 Base T Support

Page 36: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-1

Chapter 5. Product Specifications 5.1 General Specifications

Table 5.1 describes the common specification of each module used in GLOFA PLC redundant series. [Table 5.1] General Specifications

No Item Specification Related Spec.

1 Operating Temp. 0 ~ 55

2 Storage Temp. -25 ~ 70

3 Operating Moist. 5 ~ 95%RH, non-condensing

4 Storage Moist. 5 ~ 95%RH, non-condensing

For discontinuous vibration Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Number

10≤f∠57 Hz - 0.075mm 57 ≤f≤150 Hz 9.8m/s2(1G) -

For continuous vibration Frequency Acceleration Amplitude

10≤f∠57 Hz - 0.035mm

5 Vibration proof

57≤f≤150 Hz 4.9m/s2(0.5G) -

Each 10 times in X, Y, Z

direction

IEC 61131-2

6 Impact proof • Max. impact acceleration : 147m/s2(15G) • Authorized time : 11ms • Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse(each 3 times in X, Y, Z 3 direction)

IEC 61131-2

Square wave impulse noise ±1,500 V

Test spec. reference within LGIS

Static electric discharging Voltage :4kV(Contact discharging) IEC 61131-2

IEC 1000-4-2 Radiation electro-

magnetic field noise 27 ~ 500 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61131-2 IEC 1000-4-3

Segment Power Module

Digital I/O(24V more)

Digital I/O (24Vor less) Analogue

Input/Output Communication

Interface

7 Noise proof

Fast transient/burst noise

Voltage 2kV 1kV 0.25kV

IEC 61131-2 IEC 1000-4-4

8 Ambient conditions No corrosive gas and dust

9 Operating height 2,000m or less

10 Pollution level 2 or less

11 Cooling type Natural air cooling

Remark

1) IEC(International Electro-technical Commission) : International Electro-technical Commission, International non-governmental organization enacting international standards of electric and electronic fields.

2) Pollution : Index indicating the pollution of operating environment to determine the insulation capacity of equipment. Pollution Grade 2 means when only non-conductive pollution normally occurred. But, temporary conduction can be occurred due to condensing.

Page 37: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-2

5.2 Redundant Module Specifications 5.2.1 CPU Module Specifications (GMR-CPUA/GMR-CPUB)

[Table 5.2] CPU Module Performance Specifications Performance Specifications

Item GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB

Remarks

Control Method Repetitive operation, Positive cycle operation, interrupt operation

I/O Control Method Scan Batched Processing Immediate I/O Enabled by immedia-te I/O Function

Program Language LD (Ladder Diagram) IL (Instruction List) SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

Operator LD:13 EA, IL:21 EA

Basic Function 156 EA Basic Function Block 11 EA

Language Type

Dedicated Function Block

Redundant dedicated function block by special function modules

Refer to Appendix Function/Function Block Table

Operator 0.12 µs / Command

Basic FunctionBasic Function Block

0.12 µs / Step Operation Processing

Speed Real Operation

Floating-point operation: several nos. us, Trigonometric function operation: 10~30us

Refer to Appendix Function/Function Block Table

Program Memory Capacity 512K byte(128K Step) 2M byte (256K Step

+ Program Memory)

I/O point 3,840 points(Using 32-point module) 7,680 points(Using 64-point module) About 32,000 points(Through Network)

Direct Variable Area

0 K ~ 64 Kbyte(Operation delay time increased in stand-by movement as the size of operation area: 2ms/1Kbyte) Parameter setting

Data Memory Symbolic Variable

Area

256 Kbyte Direct Variable Area(Operation delay time increased in stand-by movement as operation amount: 2ms/1Kbyte)

Timer Not limited by points Range: Between 0.001 and 4294967.295 seconds(1,193 hours)

Holding 8 byte of symbolic variable per 1 point

Count Not limited by points Range : -32,768 ~ +32,767

Holding 8 byte of symbolic variable per 1 point

Operation Mode RUN, STOP, DEBUG Data Retain in a power

failure Set to Retain in Variable Definition

Page 38: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-3

Performance Specifications

Item GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB

Remark

Program Block No. 180 EA

Scan 180 EA(Number of Program Block registered as Task program)

Positive Period Task 32 EA

Outside Contact Task 16 EA

Inside Contact Task 16 EA

Stand-by Task Process by Program Block Unit

Initialization 2 EA(_INIT, _H_INIT)

Program Type

Error Process 1 EA(_ERR_SYS)

Self-monitoring Master/Stand-by operation monitoring Operation delay, memory error, I/O error, battery error, and power error and etc.

Restart Mode Cold, Warm, (Hot Restart)

Extended Base No. Total 16(Redundant Base B is able to be installed additionally)

I/O configuration Redundant I/O, Switched I/O, One-sided I/O Base unit configura-tion

Master/Stand-by Switchover Time Within 50ms

Delay time in stand-by operation

Within 50ms (When using within standard memory: Within 10Kbyte) If using exceeding standard memory, 2ms increased per 1Kbyte.

Delay time in redundant operation

Increased in proportional to operation I/O point, I/O configuration, communication module operation no., special module operation, and etc.

Master/Stand-by Switchover

Auto switch by heavy fault, switch by programmer, switch by key.

Auto Switch: CPU Shutdown, abnormal operation

Communication Redundancy Communication module redundancy, cable redundancy

Page 39: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-4

5.2.2 Each Part Name of CPU Module This section describes each part name of GMR-CPUA/B module.

Front Display

7 SEG : Displays CPU operation and errorstatus.

RUN, STOP, REMOTE, ERROR, FAIL LED :Displays CPU operation. ∗1

Mode Key(RUN, REMOTE, STOP) : Sets CPUoperation mode. ∗2

Manual Reset Switch: System restart. ∗3

RS-232C Connector: Connects with peripheralequipment

Memory module mounting connector: Connectsbetween CPU and memory module.

Battery mounting connector : Connects betweenCPU and back up battery.

Page 40: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-5

∗1

LED Display

RUN STOP REMOTE ERROR FAIL

7-Segment

Status Operation

Mode

On Off Off Off Off LrUn Local Run

Off On Off Off Off Stop Local Stop

On Off On Off Off rrUn Remote Run

Off On On Off Off Stop Remote Stop

On Off On Off Off dbg Remote Debug

X X X On Off E S

Error

X X X X On − Module Failure

∗2

Mode Key Position Operation Mode

STOP → REM Remote Stop

REM → RUN Local Run

RUN → REM Remote Run

REM → STOP Local Stop

Remarks

∗ Remote Mode Change (By GMWIN or Communication) is enabled only when Mode Key set to ‘REM’ Remote (Refers to ‘6.2.4 How to change program run mode’)

∗3 Manual Reset Switch Operations Manual Reset Switch

Operation Operation

Within 5 seconds (Press→Release)

‘rSt’ is displayed in 7-Segment and restarted in Cold or Warm mode as setting parameter

More than 5 seconds (Press→Release)

‘rSt c’ is displayed in 7-Segment and restarted in Cold mode unconditionally when switch released.

Page 41: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-6

5.2.3 Battery Specifications This describes battery specifications available in GMR−CPUA/B module.

Item Specification

Rated Voltage DC 3.0 V

Warranty period 5 years

Usage User program and data backup, RTC operation in a power failure

Specification Lithium 3V, CR1/2AA, VARTA

Remarks

∗ Warranty period and back-up time due to a power failure can be varied as operating temperature.

Page 42: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-7

5.2.4 Redundant Interface Module Specifications(GMR-DIFA)

*1 Status Display LED

LED

A+B A SEL B SEL CPU-A CPU-B Operation

ON OFF OFF ON OFF CPU-A as a mater in Redundant Operation Mode.

ON OFF OFF OFF ON CPU-B as a mater in Redundant Operation Mode.

OFF ON OFF ON OFF CPU-A as one-sided operation

OFF OFF ON OFF ON CPU-B as one-sided operation

*2 Operation Setting by Redundant Setting Key Mode Key Position Operation Setting

A+B Redundant Operation

A SEL Only CPU-A operation

B SEL Only CPU-B operation

A+B, A SEL, B SEL, CPU−A, CPU−B LED : Displays redundant setting mode and operatingmaster ∗1

Redundant Setting Key (A+B, A SEL, B SEL) : Sets redundant system operation ∗2

DIF module connecting/disconnecting power cablet d i ti

RS−232C Connector: connects to GMWIN.

Page 43: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-8

5.2.5 CPU Redundant Base Specifications (GMR-B02M, GMR-B04M) (1) GMR−B02M

* There are ‘Interface Driver and Communication Module Mounting Slot’ set to 2 slot (See Above Figure) and Extended(4-slot:GMR-B04M) in redundant base.

(2) GMR-B04M

Base Mounting Guide Hole:

To mount Control Panel with thisbase module

Power ModuleConnector

Redundant InterfaceModule Connector

Remote interface driver, communication module connector

Each Module InterlockingHook

Power Module Connector

FG Terminal: Ground terminal connected with shield pattern of PCB bhoard

Remote interface driver, communication module connector

CPU Connector

Base Module Set Screw:

Screw Hole setting basemodule to panel

Each Module Set Hole:

If setting each module, insert HOOK of each module and set the module.

Redundant IF Module connect/disconnect cable connector

Page 44: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-9

5.2.6 Extended Base Specifications

1) Switched Input/Output Extended Base (GMR-B08E, GMR-B012E)

Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 Base N Base N+1

I/O Module: Digital I/O Module, Special Module(Position Control Module Diavailable), Interrupt Module I/O, Communication: Computer Communication(Cnet) Module can be mounted in Slot 0 through 3 of the first Switched Base with Base No. set to 1.(Disabled in 12-slot type base) 12-slot base operates with the same of that attached with 2 bases(Slot 0 through 7 are designated with the number set in Interface and next Slot 0 through 3 recognized as Slot 0 through 3 of the next base number.

2) Redundant I/O Extended Base (GM2-B08E,GM2-B06E,GM2-B04E,GM2-B12E) Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 Base N Base N+1

PW

R

I/O M

odule

I/F(FRIC

)

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/F(FRIC

)

GM

2-B08E

PW

R

I/O M

odule

I/F(FRIC

)

I/F(FRIC

)

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

GM

2-B06E

PW

R

I/O M

odule

I/F(FRIC

)

I/O(I/F)

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

GM

2-B04E

I/O Module: Digital I/O Module, Analogue Module (A/D, D/A:16 Channel Voltage Type, TC, RTD) Mountable Interrupt, Position Control, Highway Counter Module Disavailable I/O(I/F) : I/O Module Mountable FRIC Mounted when used as Switched Base

PW

R

PW

R

I/O M

odule

I/F (FRIC

)

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/F (FRIC

)

GM

R-B

12E

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

PW

R

PW

R

I/O/C

omm

unication

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O/C

omm

unication

I/O/C

omm

unication

I/O/C

omm

unication

GM

R-B

08E

I/F(FRIC

)

I/F(FRIC

)

PW

R

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

GM

2-B12E

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/O M

odule

I/F(FRIC

)

I/F(FRIC

)

Page 45: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-10

5.2.7 Power Redundant Module Specifications

1) Usage • Used to prevent a failure using two power modules in a base. • Used in Redundant Basic Base and Switched I/O Base.

2) Type • There are 4 types of GMR-PA1A, GMR-PA2A, GMR-PA1B, GMR-PA2B as operating Input Power Voltage and Output Power/Voltage. • For detailed, refer to ‘5.3 Power Module’.

3) How to replace power module (1) Check the power module for error on Switched Base:

If an error occurred in any of redundant power modules, system operates normally and raises warning message.

If power error occurred in Switched Base, ‘_E_RPWR_WR’(Redundant Power Error of Extended Base)flag turns ON among System Warning Flags. Users replace the power module with LED off among Switched Base connected to the channel of which Error LED illuminated in Interface Driver Module(FDIA).

(2) Replace Power Module: Any power module due to an error or old should be replaced immediately. Remove the power module during normal operation and mount new module. This time you should use redundant power module.

Page 46: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-11

5.3 Power Module

This describes type, specification and selection method of power module.

5.3.1 Performance Specifications This table describes performance specifications of power module

Specification

GMR−PA1A GMR−PA1B GMR−PA2A GMR−PA2B Item

GM1−PA1A GM3−PA1A GM1−PA2A GM3−PA2A Base Mounting

Position Mounted at Power Module Slot

Input Power AC 110V(−15% ~ +10%) AC 220V(−15% ~ +10%)

Input Frequency 50/60Hz ± 3Hz

Input Power 2.5A(Max. Load) 1.5A(Max. Load)

Rush Current 40A or less : AC 264V (AC 132V) Power Input

Rated Output Power 12A(5V) 6A(5V)/1.5A(24V) 12A(5V) 6A(5V)/1.5A(24V)

∗ 1 Overcurrent Protection 13~20A(5V) 7.5~13A(5V)

1.6~3A(24V) 13~20A(5V) 7.5~13A(5V) 1.6~3A(24V)

Efficiency 70% or more

Power Display LED ON in power input

Suitable Lead Spec. 1.5 ~ 2.5mm2 (AWG16 ~ 22) Suitable Tightening

Torque 12kg cm

Weight 0.7kg or less

Fuse Rated AC 250V, 5A ∗ 2 Allowable Instantaneous Electrostatic

Within 20ms

[Table 5.3] Power Module Performance Specifications

Remarks

∗1 : Overcurrent Protection If applied with the current exceeding the specification in DC 5V, DC24V circuit, overcurrent protection

device shuts off the circuit and makes the system stopped. If this device operated, remove the cause of lack in current capacity, short, and etc. and then restart

the system. If system doesn’t operate with LED exhausted, it is necessary to replace the power module.

∗2 : Allowable Instantaneous Electrostatic

It means the time elapsed from Input Power Off until output voltage becomes below 4.75V in DC 5V.

Page 47: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-12

5.3.2 Power Module Selection Power Module is selected as the sum of consumption current of each CPU, I/O, Special Module, and etc., where supplied with power from Power Module. In power redundant configuration, use GMR-PA1A(2A) Module. When selecting power module in accordance with consumption current, calculate it with one power module capacity even in power redundant configuration. 1) Consumption Current of each module Table 5.4 describes the consumption current of each module. Select the power module in accordance with system configuration.

(Unit:mA) Config. Name Consumption Current Config. Name Consumption Current

GMR-CPUA G3Q-SS2A 370

GMR-CPUB 1,200

G3Q-SS4A 690

GMR-DIFA 250 G3F-INTA 190

GM2-FDIA 630 G3F-AD4A 670

GM2-FRIA 670 G3F-AD4B 540

GM2-FRIB 690 G3F-AD3A 610

G3I-D22A 70 G3F-DA4V 200

G3I-D22C 70 G3F-DA4I 200

G3I-D24A 140 G3F-DA3V 600

G3I-D28A 150 G3F-DA3I 70

G3I-A12A 70 G3F-TC4A 350

G3I-A14A 140 G3F-RD3A 440

G3I-A22A 70 G3F-PIDA 200

G3I-A24A 140 G3F-AT4A 240

G3Q-RY2A 110 G3F-HSCA 300

G3Q-RY4A 220 G3L-CUEA 150

G3Q-TR2A 120 G3L-FUEA 170

G3Q-TR4A 220 G3L-FUOA 130

G3Q-TR4B 200 G3L-RBEA 160

G3Q-TR8A 300 G3L-RBOA 170

G3Q-TR8B 280 G3L-EUEA 290

[Table 5.4] Consumption Current of Each Module(DC 5V Standard)

Page 48: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-13

5.3.3 Each Part Name This describes each part name of Power Module.

Power LED : DC5V Power Display LED

Power Fuse and Fuse Holder : AC Input Power AC110V ~ AC220V 3A Fuse as Holder

Power Input Terminal : As Power InputTerminal, connects AC power ofAC110V or AC220V.

LG Earth : Has a half potential of earthand input power of Power Filter.

DC24V, DC24G Terminal : Supplieswith Module using 24V inside of OutputModule(Using External Wiring).

PWR

Page 49: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-14

5.4 I/O Module Operation Specifications In Redundant System Configuration, there are some limitations when using special module. See the following to match with system configuration.

5.4.1 Operation Specifications of basic system 1) Basic Base:

Redundant Basic Base can only be mounted with Interface Module and next upper system for installing Extended Base and Communication Module for communication with the other PLC system and remote I/O system.

2) Switched Base:

• Special Module: Any Modules excepting Position Control(G3F-POPA, G3F-POAA, and etc.) and Communication Module (But, Slot 0 through 3 set as No. 1 of 8-slot type switched bases can be mounted with Computer Communication Module).

• Digital I/O: All kinds of I/O Module

3) Redundant Base:

• Special Module: A/D Module, D/A Module, TC Input Module, RTD Input Module - If receiving redundant ‘A/D Input Module’ in a sensor, only Circuit configuration for voltage input can be used. - If using redundant ‘D/A output Module’ as a package, only 16 Channel Voltage Output Type Module can be used. - TC, RTD module should be installed with two sensors respectively.

• Digital I/O: ‘DC Input Module’ and ‘TR Source Output Module’ are recommended to be used. (See ‘Chapter 10 Input Triplex, Output redundancy’)

Page 50: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-15

5.5 I/O Module This describes I/O Module and Interrupt Module used commonly in GLOFA PLC GMR GM1, GM2, and GM3.

5.5.1 Precautions when selecting I/O Module This describes precautions when selecting I/O Module of GLOFA PLC.

(1) Take consideration in desired response time because of different delay time according to I/O module. (2) Select input module with input voltage in considerations.

(3) Use the output module not exceeding rated open/close capacity.

(4) Check the authorized voltage to load is AC or DC.

(5) Take precautions of SSR Output Module in case of load with low power factor or inductive load. If using relay output module, the life of module will be reduced.

(6) I/O Module has semi-permanent life using semi-conductor, but relay module has the limited life due to mechanical switching. (7) Relay output module has the life as shown in the below figure. Select module with considerations of load characteristics.

Open/Close

Open/C

lose Life

Page 51: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-16

5.6 I/O Module Specifications

5.6.1 I/O Module Performance Specifications (1) 16-point DC 12/24V Input Module Specifications

DC Input Module Config. Name Spec. G3I−D22A Input Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V Rated Input Current 5 mA 11 mA Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5% of ripple rate) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% (8-point/1COM) Simultaneous ON ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less Input Resistance About 2.2 kΩ

OFF→ON 10 ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 10 ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 70mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON. External Connection Method 20-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 Screw) Weight (Kg) 0.37kg

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

DC In

DC In

Page 52: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-17

(2) 32-point DC 12/24V Input Module Specifications

DC Input Module Config. Name

Specification G3I-D24A Input Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V Rated Input Current 5 mA 11mA Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5% of ripple rate) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 60% (5-point/1COM) Simultaneous ON ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less Input Resistance About 2.2 kΩ

OFF→ON 10 ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 10 ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 140mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON. External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 Screw) Weight (Kg) 0.46kg

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Inside Circuit

Terminal NoDC In

DC In

Page 53: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-18

(3) 16-point DC 12/24V Input Module(Stand-alone COM) Specifications

DC Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3I-D22C Input Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V Rated Input Current 5mA 11mA Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5 % of ripple rate) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% (5-point/1COM) Simultaneous ON ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less Input Resistance About 2.2kΩ

OFF→ON 10ms or less Response time ON→OFF 10ms or less

Common Method 1-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 70mA Operation Display LED illuminated with input ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.46 kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Terminal No

Page 54: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-19

(4) 64-point DC 12/24V Input Module Specifications

DC Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3I-D28A Input Point 64-point Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V Rated Input Current 3mA 7mA Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5 % of ripple rate) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 60% (19-point/1COM) simultaneous ON ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less Input Resistance About 3.3kΩ

OFF→ON 10ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 10ms or less Common Method 32-point/1COM (Common Pin : 17, 18, 19, 20, 37, 38, 39, 40) Inside Consumption Current 150mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON External Connection Method 40-pin 2 connectors Weight (Kg) 0.46kg

Inside Circuit

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Inside Circuit

DC In DC In

Page 55: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-20

(5) 16-point AC 110V Input Module Specifications

AC 110V Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3I−A12A Input Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage AC 100V~120V (50/60Hz) Rated Input Current 11Ma (AC 110V/60Hz) Operating Voltage AC 85~132V(50/60Hz±3Hz) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% (8-point/1COM) simultaneous ON Rush Current Within Max. 300mA 0.3 ms (AC 132V) ON Voltage/ON Current AC 80V or more/6mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 30V or less/3mA or less Input Impedance 약 10kΩ

OFF→ON 15ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 25ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 70mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON External Connection Method 20-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.42kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

AC110V IN

AC110V IN

AC110V IN

Page 56: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-21

(6) 32-point AC 110V Input Module Specifications

AC 110V Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3I-A14A Input Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage AC 100V~120V(50/60Hz) Rated Input Current 11mA(AC 110V/60Hz) Operating Voltage AC 85~132V(50/60Hz±3Hz) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 60%(5-point/1COM) simultaneous ON

Rush Current Within Max. 300mA 0.3ms (AC 132V) ON Voltage/ON Current AC 80V or more/6mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 30V or less/3mA or less Input Impedance About 10kΩ

OFF→ON 15ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 25ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 140mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.56kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

AC110v IN

AC110vIN

AC110VIN

Page 57: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-22

(7) 16-point AC 220V Input Module Specifications

AC 220V Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3I−A22A Input Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage AC 200V~240V(50/60Hz) Rated Input Current 11mA(AC 220V/60Hz) Operating Voltage AC 170~264V(50/60Hz±3Hz) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100%(8-point/1COM) simultaneous ON Rush Current Within 600mA 0.12 ms (AC 264V) ON Voltage/ON Current AC 150V or more/4.5mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 50V or less/3.0mA or less Input Impedance About 20kΩ

OFF→ON 15ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 25ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 70mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON External Connection Method 20-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.42kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

AC110v IN

AC110v IN

AC110v IN

Page 58: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-23

(8) 32-point AC 220V Input Module Specifications

AC 220V Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3I-A24A Input Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage AC 200V~240V(50/60Hz) Rated Input Current 11mA(AC 220V/60Hz) Operating Voltage AC 170~264V(50/60Hz±3Hz) Max. Simultaneous Input Point 60%(8 point/1COM) simultaneous ON

Rush Current Within 600mA 0.12 ms (AC 264V) ON Voltage/ON Current AC 150V or more/4.5mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 50V or less/3.0mA or less Input Impedance About 20kΩ

OFF→ON 15ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 25ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 140mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Input On External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.56kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Page 59: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-24

5.6.2 Output Module Specifications (1) 16-point relay output module specifications

Relay Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−RY2A Output Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation RatedOpen/Close Voltage/Current DC 24V 2A(resistance load) , AC 220V/2A(COSΨ=1)/1-point, 8A/1COM

Min.Open/Close Voltage/Current DC 5V/1mA Max.Open /Close Voltage/Current AC 250V, DC 150V Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA(AC 220V, 60Hz) Max. Open/Close Frequency 3,600 times/hours Surge Killer Varister

Mechanical More than 20 million times Rated Open/close Voltage/Current load 0.1 million times or more AC 200V/1.5A, AC 240V/1A(COSΨ=0.7) 0.2 million times or more AC 200V/1A, AC 240V/0.5A(COSΨ=0.35) 0.2 million times or more

Life Electrical

DC 24V/1A, DC 100V/0.1A(L/R=7ms) 0.2 million times or more Voltage DC 24V±10%(less than 4 Vp-p of ripple voltage) External Power

Supply Current 150mA or less(TYP. DC 24V all points ON) OFF→ON 10ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 12ms or less

Common Method 8-point/1COM InsideConsumption Current 110mA Operation Display LED illuminated with output ON External Connection Method 20-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.46kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

External Load

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Page 60: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-25

(2) 32-point Relay Output Module Specifications

Relay Output Module Config. Name Spec. G3Q−RY4A Output Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation Rated Open/Close Voltage/Current DC 24V/1A (resistance load), AC 220V/1A(COS Ψ=1)/1-point, 5A/1COM

Min. Open/Close Voltage/Current DC 5V/1mA

Max. Open/Close Voltage/Current AC 270V, DC 150V

Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA(AC 220V, 60Hz) Max.Open/Close Frequency 3,600 times/hour

Surge Killer None Mechanical 20 million times or more

Rated Open/close Voltage/Current load 0.1 million times or more AC 200V/1.5A, AC 240V/1A(COSΨ=0.7) 0.2 million times or more AC 200V/1A, AC 240V/0.5A(COSΨ=0.35) 0.2 million times or more

Life Electrical

DC 24V/1A, DC 100V/0.1A(L/R=7ms) 0.2 million times or more Voltage DC 24V±10%(ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) External

Power Supply Current 170mA(TYP. DC 24V contact ON) OFF→ON 10ms or less Response

Time ON→OFF 12ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 220mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector(M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.55 kg

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

External load

Page 61: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-26

(3) 16-point Transistor Output Module Specifications

Transistor Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−TR2A Output Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Open/Close Voltage DC 12/24V Operating Open/Close Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V Max. Load Current 2A/1-point, 5A/1COM Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less Max. Rush Current 4A 100ms or less/8A 10ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.5V (2A) Surge Killer Clamp Diode

Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less) External Power Supply Current 100mA (TYP, all points ON)

OFF→ON 2 ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 2 ms or less

Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 120mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON External Connection Method 20-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.54kg

Inside Circuit

External Load

TerminalNo

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

External Load

Page 62: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-27

(4) 32-point Transistor Output Module(Sink Type) Specifications

Transistor Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−TR4A Output Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V Max. Load Current 0.5A/1-point, 3A/1COM Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less Max. Rush Current 4A 100ms or less/8A 10ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.5V (2A) Surge Killer Clamp Diode

Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple Voltage 4Vp-p or less) External Power Supply Current 150mA (TYP. Contact ON)

OFF→ON 2ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 2ms or less Common Method 16-point/1 COM Inside Consumption Current 220mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 Screw) Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Inside Circuit

External Load

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

External Load

Page 63: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-28

(5) 32-point Transistor Output Module(Source Type) Specifications

Transistor Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−TR4B Output Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo coupler Insulation Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V Max. Load Current 0.5A/1-point, 3A/1COM Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less Max. Rush Current 4A 100ms or less/8A 10ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.5V (2A) Surge Killer Varister

Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less) External Power Supply Current 150mA (TYP. All points On)

OFF→ON 2ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 2ms or less Common Method 16-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 200mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

Terminal No

Externalload

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Page 64: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-29

(6) 64-point Transistor Output Module(Sink Type) Specifications

Transistor Output Module Config. name

Spec. G3Q−TR8A G3Q−TR8A ( 2004.6 ~ ) Output Point 64-point Insulation Method Photo coupler Insulation Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V Max. Load Current 0.1A/1-point, 2A/1COM Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less Max. Rush Current 0.5A 10ms or less 0.7A 10ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.0V or less / 0.1A DC 0.2V or less / 0.1A Surge Killer Clamp Diode Zener Diode

Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less) External Power Supply Current 150mA or less

(TYP. All points ON) 20mA or less (TYP. All points ON)

OFF→ON 2ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 2ms or less

Common Method 32-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 300mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON External Connection Method 40 pin 2 connectors Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Inside Circuit

ExternalLoad

Page 65: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-30

(7) 64-point Transistor Output Module(Source Type) Specifications

Transistor Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−TR8B Output Point 64-point Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V Max. Load Current 0.1A/1-point, 2A/1COM Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less Max. Rush Current 0.4A 100ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.0V(TYP) 0.1A

Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V External Power Supply Current 100mA or less (per TYP. DC 24V 1 COM)

OFF→ON 2ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 2ms or less Common Method 32-point/1COM (COM Pin : 19, 20, 39, 40) Inside Consumption Current 280mA Operation Display LED illuminated with output On External Connection Method 40 pin 2 connectors Weight (Kg) 0.42kg

Inside Circuit

Pin NO

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Page 66: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-31

(8) 16-point SSR Output Module Specifications

SSR Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−SS2A Output Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation Rated Load Voltage AC 100~240V(50/60Hz) Max. Load Voltage AC 264V Max. Load Current 2A/1-point, 5A/1COM Min. Load Current 20mA Current Leakage in OFF 2.5mA (AC 220V 60 Hz) Max. Rush Current 40A 10ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON AC 1.5V or less (2A) Surge Killer Varister (387~473V), C.R observer

OFF→ON 0.5Cycle + 1ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 0.5Cycle + 1ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 370mA Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON External Connection Method 20-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Inside Circui

External Load

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

(ZC:Zero Cross Circuit)

External Load

Terminal No

Page 67: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-32

(9) 32-point SSR Output Module Specifications

SSR Output Module Config. Name

Spec. G3Q−SS4A Output Point 32-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Load Voltage AC 100~240V(50/60Hz) Max. Load Voltage AC 264V Max. Load Current 1A/1-point, 5A/1COM Min. Load Current 20mA Current Leakage in OFF 2mA (AC 220V 60Hz) Max. Rush Current 25A 10ms or less Max. Voltage Drop in ON AC 1.5V or less (2A) Surge Killer Varister (387 ~ 473V), C.R observer

OFF→ON 0.5 Cycle + 1ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 0.5 Cycle + 1ms or less Common Method 8-point/1COM Inside Consumption Current 690mA Operation Display LED illuminated with output ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight (Kg) 0.6kg

Inside Circuit

External load

Terminal No

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

External load

(ZC:Zero Cross Circuit)

Page 68: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-33

5.6.3 Interrupt Input Module Specifications Interrupt Input Module Config. Name

Spec. G3F−INTA Input Point 16-point Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation Rated Input Voltage DC 24V Rated Input Current 10 mA Input Impedance About 2.4kΩ Operating Voltage DC 21.6~26.4V Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% simultaneous ON ON Voltage/ON Current DC 15V or more/6.5mA or more OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 5V or less/2mA or less

OFF→ON 0.5ms or less Response Time ON→OFF 0.5ms or less

Ground Method 1-point/1COM Signal Detecting Rising or Falling Edge(Dip Switch Setting in the unit of channel) Inside Consumption Current 190mA Operation Display LED illuminated with input ON External Connection Method 38-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw) Weight(kg) 0.4kg

Terminal No

Inside Circuit

Circuit Configuration

External Connection

Diagram

Page 69: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-34

5.7 Interface Module Specifications

5.7.1 Remote Interface Module Specifications Remote Interface Module is used when installing the extended base in Driver−>Receiver pairs. Interface Module Specifications are as shown in the following table.

Type Remote Interface Module Spec. Remark Signal Transmission

Method Differential Transmission Parallel Bus Method

Max. Operating Range 100m (Sum of CH1, CH2) Form R4 to R8 in entire configuration Driver Module GM2−FDIA Mountable up to 4.

Receiver Module GM2−FRIA, GM2-FRIC GM2-FRIC used in 12-slot base Max. Extended Module 8 per GM2−FDIA module 8 mountable in one CH(Channel)

GM2−FDIA : 630mA Consumption Current

GM2−FRIA : 670mA

5.7.2 Remote Interface Module Configuration

5.7.2.1 Entire Configuration

I/O R1

D I/O

I/O R2

I/O R3

I/O R5

I/O R4

CH1

/

I/O R6

I/O R7

I/O R8

Extended Base #1

#2

#3

#4

#5

#6

#8

#7

CH0

P W R

P W R

PWR

P W R

P W R

PWR

PWR

PWR

P W R C P U

CPU : CPU Module I/O : I/O module, Special/Communication Module(Disable to mount at Communication Module in Extended Base, Some Special Module Dismountable) D : Remote Driver Module R0-F7 : Remoter Receiver Module

Extended Base

Extended Base

Extended Base

Extended Base

Extended Base

Extended Base

Extended Base

Page 70: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-35

5.7.2.2 Remote Interface Driver Module This provides each part name of GM2−FDIA module.

The channel without extended cable should be mounted with Termination Resistance Module with On/Off switch set to Off.

CH1

CH2

CH1 : Connector to mount extended cable.

CH1 ON/OFF : Turns On/Off the extended base connected to CH1.

OPER LED : Indicates the operation of Driver Module.

CH2 에러 LED : Indicates Extended Base error connected to Ch2.

CH2 : Connector to mount extended cable

CH2 ON/OFF Switch: Turns On/Off the extended base connected toCh2.

FAIL LED : Indicates Mounting position error of Driver Module.

CH1 Error LED : Indicates Extended Base Error connected to Ch1.

Page 71: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-36

5.7.2.3 Remote Interface Receiver Module

The following indicates each part name of GM2−FRIA, GM2-FRIC Module.

If not installed with Extended Cable at OUT of Final Base, set END switch to Y and mount the terminal resistance at OUT.

Base number can be set between 1 and 15. If mounting to 12-slot base, base number is set to even number(See page. 3.3.1).

IN : Connects to CH1/2 of driver module or OUT of receiver module.

Base Number Setting Switch

OPER Switch : Determines the operation of receiver module.

END Switch : Final Extended Base Setting

OPER LED : Indicates the operation of receiver module

FAIL LED : Indicates if Receiver Module is normal.

OUT : Connected to IN of receiver module mounted at Lower Base.

Page 72: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-37

5.7.3 Termination Resistance Remote Interface module transmits and receives the signal using Differential method(RS−485 Spec.). In case of remote connection, termination resistance module should be mounted for higher reliability. (1) Structure

(2) Mounting Position

5.7.4 Cable Specifications The following table describes extended cable specifications of this PLC.

Config. Name G2C−E031 G3C−E061 G2C−E121 G2C−E401 G2C−E

Length (m) 0.3 0.6 1.2 4.0 Customized

Usage Connection between Interface Driver Module and Receiver Module Connection between Interface Receiver Module and Receiver Module

For Cable type, see catalogue.

Mounting Position

PWR

C P U

I / O

D

PWR

I / O

R

CH1

PWR

I / O

R

PWR

I / O

R

PWR

I / O

R

CH0

Mounting Position

Page 73: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-38

5.7.5 How to install Remoter Interface Module 1) How to Install

(1) Mount GM2-FDIA at basic base and GM2-FRIC at extended base. (2) Connect the cable between GM2-FDIA and GM2-FRIC and between GM2-FRIC and GM2- FRIC. (3) Set On/Off switch of CH1 and CH2 in GM2-FDIA. (4) Set OPER, RACK#, and END switches of GM2-FRIC. (5) Install Termination Resistance at the connector of GM2-FRIC with END switch and unused channel connector of GM2-FDIA. (6) Power Input (7) Check the operation using LED.

Driver Module

− Checks FAIL LED of GM2-FDIA turns off. − Checks OPER LED of GM2-FDIA turns on. − Checks ERROR LED of CH1 and CH2 in GM2-FDIA CH1 turns off.

Receiver Module

− Checks FAIL LED of GM2-FRIC turns off. − Checks OPER LED of GM2-FRIC turns on.

Extended Base 1 R1

Extended Base 4 R4

Extended Base 7 R7

Extended Base 2 R2

Extended Base 5 R5

Extended Base 8 R8

Extended Base 3 R3

Extended Base 6 R6

Extended Base 9 R9

Power

F D I A

F D I A

F D I A

F D I A

Power

GM2-FDIA : CH1 Off, CH2 On

GM2-FDIA : CH1 On, CH2 On

Redundant Basic Base

R3, R6, R9 : END ‘Y’

Page 74: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5-39

2) Error Check

When FAIL LED illuminated For GM2-FDIA

− If GM2-FDIA mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position. − If no error in position, replace the module or ask AS.

For GM2-FRIC

− If GM2-FRIC mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position. − Check that the extended base is installed with GM2-NRIA. − If no error as shown in the above, replace the module or ask AS.

When OPER LED not illuminated

For GM2-FDIA − If GM2-FDIA mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position. − Check CPU Module installed properly. − If no error as shown in the above, replace the module or ask AS.

For GM2-FRIC

− If GM2-FRIC mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position. − Check POWER LED. − Check that OPER set to “Y”. − Check CH ON/OFF switch of GM2-FDIA set to ON. − Check cable installed properly. − Check CPU installed properly. − In Switched I/O configuration, it is normal that OPER LED of the module connected to Master illuminated and that connected to Stand-by not illuminated. − If no error as shown in the above, replace the module or ask AS.

When ERROR LED of GM2-FDIA Illuminated

Check that CH ON/OFF switch set correctly. − Turns ON the channel connecting with GM2-FRIC and turns OFF if not.

Check OPER and END switches of GM2-FRIC set properly.

− Check END switch of GM2-FRIC mounted in the bottom base set properly.

Check cable for connection. − Connect between OUT of GM2-FDIA and In of GM2-FRIC and between OUT of GM2-FRIC and IN of GM2-FRIC.

Check extended base for power supply.

− Check LED of power module illuminated.

Check any one of two power modules in Switched I/O base(redundant power base)) for abnormal. − Check LED of Power Module illuminated(FAIL LED of GM2-FRIC in the base attached with

abnormal power turns off but CH ERROR LED of GM2-FDIA connected with the desired GM2-FRIC turns on).

Page 75: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 6. Operation Mode

6-1

Chapter 6. Operation Mode 6.1 Types of Operation Mode

There are program run modes of each CPU module and operation mode of redundant system in Operation Mode.

(1) Program Run Mode

With program process of each CPU module, there are RUN, STOP and DEBUG. Each mode operation can be varied in accordance with Redundant Operation.

(2) Redundant System Operation Mode

With Redundant system operation, there are redundant operation, stand-alone operation, master operation, and stand-by operation.

6.2 Program Run Mode 6.2.1 RUN Mode

It means the mode that runs program operation normally.

Start the first scan in

Mode Start

Data Area Initialization in accordancewith restart mode

Check program for valid and determineif able to run

Run Input refresh

Run scan program Run task program

Inspect the mounted module for normal operation and loose

Communication service and other i id i

Run output refresh

Do you change mode?

Change operation mode

Data Area Initialization accordingto the restart mode set

If changed from STOP to RUN mode

If being in RUN mode when powerapplied

Hold Run Mode Change into other mode

Page 76: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 6. Operation Mode

6-2

(1) When mode changed

From the first scan, initialization of data area will be run. When power applied in RUN mode, varied according to restart mode(Cold, Warm, Hot) When mode changed from STOP to RUN, varied according to restart mode (Cold, Warm) Checks the program for valid and determines it is able to run.

(2) Repetitive operation Runs Input/Output refresh and scan program operation. Senses the movement condition of task program and runs task program. Checks mounted module for normal operation and loose. Performs communication service and operation mode change inspection.

6.2.2 STOP Mode It means the mode that stops operation without program operation. Only in remote stop mode, program can be transmitted through GMWIN.

When mode changed

Deletes output image and runs output refresh.

Repetitive operation Runs Input/Output refresh. Checks mounted module for normal operation and loose. Performs communication service and operation mode change inspection.

6.2.3 DEBUG Mode It means the mode to detect program error and track operation process. Only in STOP mode, changeover into this mode is enabled. Checks the program operation and contents of each data and verifies the program. (1) When mode changed Initializes data area according to restart mode of parameter setting when initial mode changed. Deletes output image and runs output refresh. (2) Repetitive Operation Runs Input refresh. Runs Debug operation according to setting. Runs Debug operation to the last program and then runs output refresh. Checks mounted module for normal operation and loose. Performs communication service and operation mode change inspection. (3) Debug Operation Conditions The following 4 debug operation conditions can be designated simultaneously.

Operation Condition (Per one operation)

Operation Description (If operation instruction done, the operation will stops after one

performed) According to Break Point designation

If Break Point designated in program, stops at the designated point. Up to 32 break points can be designated.

According to Contact If contact area to be monitored and the status(Read, Write, Value) to be stopped designated, stops when designated operation occurred at setting contact.

According to scan frequency designation

If scan frequency to be operated designated, operates and then stops after operating as designated.

(4) Operation Method Debug Operation Control(For detailed, see GMWIN User’s Manual).

Set Debug mode in GMWIN and then runs operation. Task program is able to set operation(Enable/Disable) in the unit of each task.

Page 77: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 6. Operation Mode

6-3

Remarks

Debug mode is enabled only in stand-alone CPU operation.

6.2.4 How to Change Program Operation Mode How to change program operation mode (1) Using Mode key of CPU Module and DIF Module (2) By connecting GMWIN to communication port of CPU Module and DIF Module. (3) Through GMWIN network connected to other station. (4) By user’s command using FAM, computer communication module, and etc. (5) By ‘STOP Function’ during program operation.

6.2.4.1 Program Run Mode Change Using Mode Key

The following table describes how to change operation mode using mode key.

Mode Key Position Operation Mode

RUN Local RUN

STOP Local STOP

STOP → REM Remote STOP

REM → RUN * Local RUN

RUN → REM Remote RUN

REM → STOP Local STOP * When changed from Remote RUN to Local RUN, PLC continues to operate.

6.2.4.2 Remote Operation Mode Change

Remote Mode change is enabled only in remote mode with mode key position set to REM.

Mode Key Position Mode Change By GMWIN Using FAM, computer

communication, and etc.Remote STOP → Remote RUN O O

Remote STOP → DEBUG O X Remote RUN → Remote STOP O O

Remote RUN → DEBUG X X

DEBUG → Remote STOP O O

REM

DEBUG → Remote RUN X X

6.2.4.3 Remote Operation Mode Change Permission

Operation Mode change by other equipments can be prevented for system protection. This time, operation mode can only be changed using Mode Key and GMWIN. Set ‘PLC Control Permission by communication’ in Basic Parameter (See 12.1 Basic Parameter).

Page 78: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 6. Operation Mode

6-4

6.3 Redundant System Operation Mode

6.3.1 Redundant Operation Mode There are key switches for CPU operation mode setting and redundant operation mode setting in Redundant System.

Operation of Redundant system is classified as follows according to installation, power, DIF key and operation mode of respective CPU.

Mode Current Operation

CPU-A(B) Operation

Mode

CPU-B(A) Operation

Mode Description

Stand-alone RUN STOP Only CPU-A or B is operated equally with stand-alone

CUP while running in Redundant Operation Mode.

Redundant Operation RUN RUN CPU-A and CPU-B runs redundant operation as

master and stand-by in Redundant Operation Mode.

Redundant Operation Mode

(Key: A+B)

Stop STOP STOP CPU-A and CPU-B is set to master and stand-by but operation stops in Redundant Operation Mode.

Stand-alone CPU Mode (Key:A or B)

In Operation mode of stand-

alone CPU

-

1. Only CPU selected from CPU A or B is operated equally with stand-alone CPU. 2.The operation without designated will be STOP mode.

* Power off in redundant operation is treated as STOP.

6.3.2 Redundant Operation Mode Change (1) Redundant System operation can be changed according to changed CUP operation mode using Key or GMWIN.

Segment Current State

DIF Key setting

Change into Master

Change into Stand-by Description

-> STOP (Not changed:STOP) With master SOP, operation stops.

Stand-alone (RUN/STOP) A+B

(Not changed:RUN) -> RUN With Stand-by changed into RUN mode,

changes to Redundant operation.

-> STOP (Not changed:RUN)

With Master STOP, stand-by takes over operation and becomes stand-alone operation. Redundant

(RUN/RUN) A+B (Not changed

:RUN) -> STOP With Stand-by STOP, master becomes stand-alone operation.

Stop (STOP/STOP) A+B -> RUN (Not changed

:STOP)

First input RUN mode(A or B) starts operation and becomes stand-alone operation.

RUNREM

STOP AA+B

B RUNREM

STOP

CPU-A DIF CPU-B

Page 79: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 6. Operation Mode

6-5

(2) In redundant operation mode, operation or master can be changed using DIF key or GMWIN as follows.

Current Operation DIF Key status Operation Control and Operation

Redundant operation as A Master A+B DIF Key: A+B -> B B Stand-alone operation

Stand-alone operation B DIF Key: B -> A+B Redundant operation as B Master

Redundant operation as B Master A+B DIF Key: A+B -> A A stand-alone operation

A stand-alone operation A DIF Key: A -> A+B Redundant operation as A Master

Redundant operation as A Master A+B GMWIN: master

changeover instruction *1 Redundant operation as B Master

*1 Control after connecting with CPU to be operated as master(CPU-B in the example)

6.3.3 Master Changeover during Redundant Operation 1) If operation disabled due to a failure of mater during redundant operation, master stops operation

and stand-by continues operation as master. Master auto changeover during operation can be done as follows.

(1) When power off of master (2) When master stopped due to wrong operation of program (3) When program operation mode of master changed to STOP (4) When DIF key set to stand-alone mode of operating CPU (5) When changeover base or its module not accessed from master normally

A) Previous master not doesn’t stop operation and continues operation. B) If the same failure occurred in changed master, entire system stops operation. C) If module error mask flag set, the operation is the same with in A), but continues operation without change of master in B).

(6) When a failure occurred in Redundant Base connected to master

A) A power failure B) Base of Module Failure C) Contacts error designated as triplex input D) Output feedback data error

(7) When communication or interface module error occurred in Basic Interface (When a failure occurred in network line not communication module, master changeover is disabled.)

2) During redundant operation, master auto changeover is disabled in the following conditions. This time, warning message will be displayed.

(1) When an error occurred in any redundant power of switched base (2) If stand-by error occurred in a failure of master

A) Operation stops if the same error detected. B) In case of the above A), if mask flag set on the desired error, continues operation without master changeover. C) If master and stand-by not having the same failure e.g. cause of failure not redundant, continues operation without master changeover (Ex. If a failure detected at another position among triplex input).

3) When normal redundant operation disabled due to a failure of DIF module, master is changed into stand-alone operation and stand-by stops operation.

Page 80: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-1

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.1 Program Running Structure • Program is written by GMWIN, and then compiled and run by transmitting to PCL after converting active file compiling the program and converted to active file. • Program consists of Scan and Task Program. Scan Program is operated repetitively per scan and Task Program is operated by task.

• Scan Program is operated and then stopped from the start to the end in accordance with registered order in project. This total process is called “1 scan”. • After operating the Program from the start to the end as mentioned above, running the Program repetitively with the same process is “Repetitive operation system”. • Reading and storing the status of input module in the input image area before computing Scan Program and detecting the contents of the output image area after computing Scan Program is called I/O Refresh. • GLOFA PLC series is Repetitive operation system and do not input and output directly the status of I/O during operation, and just operated by running I/O refresh. In this case, the status of each I/O contact is stored at the memory area in PLC. This area is called I/O image area.

Operation Start

Input image area refresh

Scan Program Start

End of Scan Program

Output image area refresh

END

1 scan

.

.

.

Input module contact status

Output module contact

Run Task Program

:System self diagnosis, Communication

Operation mode changing check, etc

Input image area refresh

Output image area refresh

Page 81: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-2

7.2 Program Operation

7.2.1 Program Types Each Program of GLOFA PLC is generated using operator, function and function block that consist of Programs and divided into the followings per operating condition of Program. 1) Initial Program

• Initial Program for cold or warm restart: operated by _INIT Task • Initial Program for hot restart: operated by _H_INIT Task

2) Task Program • Positive period Task Program: Max. 32 EA • Outside Contact Task Program: Max. 16 EA • Inside Contact Task Program: Max. 16 EA

3) Scan Program • Max. 180 EA: 180 minus the Number of assigned Task Program are available.

4) Error Program • Error Task Program : Operated by _ERR_SYS Task

7.2.2 How to Run Program 1) Initialization Program

Refer to “7.3 Restart Mode” regarding each restart mode. • It is used to initiate system such as special module as initial program (_INIT Task) when operating cold or worm restart mode. Initial program performs repetitive operation until satisfying setting condition (until INITDONE flag is on at initial program). In this case, operate I/O Refresh. • When operating on Hot Restart mode, the purpose of Initial Program is to start from stopped step when power failure occurred. Initial Program is used to need special module to restore to condition before power failure or outside condition to make for normal operation. This initial program performs repetitive operation until setting condition satisfied with (until INITDONE flag is on at initial program); do not operate Output Refresh during operating Hot Restart Initial Program Use ‘DIREC_O’ function as output refresh is needed at Hot Restart Initial Program. After completing Hot Restart Initial Program, run Scan Program from previous stopped step and complete Scan Program that was stopped. In this case, do not operate Output Refresh and operate normal I/O Refresh from the next Scan. • During initial program, system operating status flag_INIT_RUN turns ON.

2) Task Program

• Program assigned by Positive period Task operates program at time interval set in task. • Program assigned by Outside interrupt task operates program by Outside interrupt contact signal occurred from interrupt module. • Program assigned by inside contact task operates program when rising edge of inside contact occurred.

Page 82: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-3

3) Scan Program

Program that is not assigned as Initial Program and Task Program among programs written by user becomes Scan Program automatically. Scan Program is running repetitively regardless of task and the priority is the lowest. And Scan Program is running sequential repetitive operation in accordance with registered order on GMWIN screen.

4) Error Program

It is error task program used when system error occurred during operating a user program. User operates program under _ERR_SYS task condition after writing a program against system error. It is possible to protect stopping of system operating with controlling System Error Mask Flag at Error Task Program (see “9.4 Error Remedy”).

7.2.3 Program Flow Chart Scan Program operates sequentially from start to end per written orders. This kind of Scan Program operates as repetitive operation system and the process is “1 scan”. Temporarily stop the Program that is currently operating and operate related Task Program when the active condition of Positive period Task or Outside Contact Task Program occurred during program operating. After operating program, check the active condition of inside contact task program and operate Task Program occurred active condition.

*1 Verify whether normal operation is available or not after checking structure information of system, module, condition of program and memory module. *2 Verify whether normal operation is still available or not after checking changed structure condition, abnormal operating of module and program.

Operation Start

Initialization

Input Refresh Processing

Scan Program Processing

Inside Contact Task Program

Self Diagnosis

Ouput Refresh Processing

1 Scan Process immediately under occurring ‘Regular Cycle TaskProgram’ condition

*1

*2

_INIT,_H_INIT:Initial TaskOperated when user writesInitial Program

_ERR_SYS:Error TaskOperated when errors occurredand program written by user

Page 83: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-4

7.2.4 Synchronization method during redundant operation

7.2.4.1 Synchronization

Synchronize data and operation point between CPU modules when running like below during redundant operation.

(1) Scan Input (Image Area) (2) Scan Output (Image Area) (3) Immediate Input (Command) (4) Immediate Output (Command) (5) When starting Program Scan (6) When starting Task (7) When processing communication (8) When processing GMWIN communication (9) When running function block for special module (10) When changing time data inside CPU

7.2.4.2 Synchronization Method

The followings are operation details of synchronization during redundant operating. 1) Input Scan (Image Area)

• Switched I/O : Master reads and transmit to standby • Redundant I/O : Operating by value that is equaled two of them when three-input • One-sided I/O : CPU-A reads input data and transfer to CUP-B

2) Scan output (Image Area) • Compare output area data of master and standby before output • Output master value unless the master does coincide. • Restart standby and coincide with master status when un-coincident.

3) Immediate Input (Command) The same method as Scan Input (only, selected input)

4) Immediate output (Command) The same method as Scan output (only, selected input)

5) When starting Program Scan Synchronize Scan start point after Scan END processing and Scan ready

6) When starting Task (1) Make kind of Task, intercepted position and start point matched with. - Scan Task, Positive period Task and Inside Contact Task.

(2) Synchronization Method

• Operate Task of upper priority using program block unit (if several program block is operated by task currently running, process the upper task that is waiting before operating each program block)

• if program block is large, process the task of the upper priority during program block by ‘standby task process function’ of user.

Page 84: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-5

7) When processing communication

HS communication synchronizes at Scan END and variable communication service is synchronized by function block.

8) When processing GMWIN communication

• Starts communication after assigning CPU to be contacted • Assigned CPU responses singly against communication of GMWIN because status of master and standby of data that is using at operation are equal. If modifying inside data as the communication result of GMWIN and line opened master CPU, data of standby is modified together. (It is possible to monitor detailed operation information of standby after contacting from GMWIN to standby) • Contact is available only through connector of DIF during redundant operating.

9) When running function block for special module Both of switched and redundant I/O performs data synchronization immediately.

10) Synchronization of time data in CPU • Two CPUs change base time together such as increased time change in CPU. • Perform synchronization of time rate after matching with two CPUs to remove errors. The base becomes value of master and time running data is used to monitor master. (Set standby value to value of master – to remove cumulative error by long operation)

Page 85: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-6

7.3 Restart Mode Restart Mode is to set whether to operate RUN Mode after initialization parameters and system when stating to operate RUN Mode by returning Mode or re-power on. It consists of Cold, Worm and Hot. The followings are operating condition of each re-start Mode (See “12.1 Basic Parameter” for setting method).

7.3.1 Cold restart • It is performed when restart mode is set to Cold Restart at parameter. • Eliminate all data to “o” and set only parameter which initial value is set to initial value. • Though Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Cold Re-start Mode when initial running after program to be run changed. • If pressing manual reset switch more than 5 sec during operating, operated by Cold Restart Mode regardless of setting Re-start Mode

7.3.2 Warm restart • It is performed when restart mode is set to Warm Restart at parameter. • Maintain previous value of data that is set to maintain previous value and the data that is set only initial value is set to initial value. Except this, eliminate all data to “0” • Though Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Cold Re-start Mode when initial running after program changed. • Though Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Cold Re-start Mode if data is abnormal. • If pressing manual reset switch within 5 sec during operating when Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Worm Re-start Mode.

7.3.3 Hot restart • It is a run mode when re-power on after power off during normal operation (in RUN Mode). It is operated on Hot Restart Mode when the time is within Hot Restart allowance setting time until re-power on after power off. • All data and program running factor is restored to the status of before power-off. Program is maintained as sudden power failure because the program runs at the status before power-off. • Operating on Restart Mode set at parameter when excess Hot Restart allowance setting time • If data contents are abnormal, operating on Cold Restart Mode.

Remarks

• Consider the followings when setting Hot Restart allowance time System operates Hot Restart Program when time that is calculated from AC Fail to system checking

completed is within setting time. If power failure occurs again before completing program operation, try again the Hot Restart Program and calculate the time form first power failure.

When a power failure occurred for more than 20ms, it takes proximately 0.5 sec until operating normally after re-power on. Hot Restart allowance time setting is set by sec.

• Above mode is adapted when master CPU operates in shutdown. Standby is not adapted on Restart mode

due to operating under currently operating master condition

• Consider followings when controlling manual reset switch during redundant operating. Total system is operating when controlling reset switch of CPU operated by master switch but only standby

CPU is operating when controlling reset switch of standby CPU.

Page 86: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-7

Power on

Operation STOP Mode OperationSTOP

Hot Restart Time?

Power Failure holding data ?

Basic Parameter SettingRestart mode?

Abnorma

RUN

Normal

Excess

Run Warm RestartRun Hot Restart

Power on within the

specified time

Run Cold Restart

Cold Restart

Warm Restart

RUN Mode Operation

(Flow chart of restart mode in power on during operation)

7.3.4 Data Initialization according to Restart Mode • Default parameter means what initial value or previous value maintain is not set, • INIT parameter is what initial value is set, • Retain parameter is what previous value maintain is set, the followings are initialization method in accordance with each kinds of restart mode. Mode Parameter COLD WARM HOT

Default Initialize to “0” Initialize to “0” Maintain previous value

Retain Initialize to “0” Maintain previous value Maintain previous value

Initialization Initialize to user assigned value Initialize to user assigned value Maintain previous

value Retain &

Initialization Initialize to user assigned value Maintain previous value Maintain previous

value

Hot Restart Time?

Power On within set time

Page 87: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-8

7.3.5 Restart Mode Application according to Operation Purpose • Cold Restart:

It is used when starting operation after a completion of initialization in whole control system.

• Warm Restart: Several (parts) processes Initialized and then operated but it is used when restarting operation under remembering previous operation result of control system

• Hot Restart:

It is used when starting operation under remembering to several (parts) processes in previous operating status of total control system. Processing status control of parts processed is used to system that is remembered and controlled by inside memory not Outside signal.

7.3.6 Operation Type in each Restart Mode Check the below for operation stopping and restarting of PCL during operating. 1) Scope

GLOFA GM series PLC become stop status after retaining operation data if operation is not available any more due to shut down during operating. And it can operate continuously because previous operation status can be restored. But changing of occurred Outside controller can’t be known under PCL shut down and also requirements that are occurred before stopping are processed following restart.

2) Cold Restart

CPU operates like below when Cold Restart. (1) Delete all previous operation data and initialize parameter. (2) Perform initialization program. In this case run I/O refresh. (3) Start normal scan program.

3) Warm Restart CPU operates like below when Warm Restart.

(1) Complete scan program and task program that are shut down. Do not process FB of special/communication module and operate with previous data. (2) Ignore task and communication service on standby. (3) Perform only input refresh and high-speed link input. (4) Initialize the parameter. (5) Perform initialization program. In this case run I/O refresh. (6) Start normal scan program.

4) Hot Restart CPU operates like below when Hot Restart.

(1) Complete scan program and task program that are shut down. Do not process function block of special/communication module and operate with previous data. (2) Perform the task on standby and ignore communication on standby. (3) Perform only input refresh and high-speed link input. (4) Initialize the parameter.

Page 88: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-9

(5) Perform Hot initialization program at this time perform only input refresh. If output refresh is necessary, use ‘DIREC_O” function. (6) Start normal scan program.

Remarks

Retain forced ON/OFF data, I/O skip data, failure mask setting data and failure history information when restart. If necessary, delete them with GMWIN.

Task that was shut down or on standby is processed when Warm and Hot restart. Result of performance is output by scan refresh. Therefore process result can be output by input data before power failure.

Positive period task is calculated by adding times which were measured before system shot down (Except time during system shut down at calculating time

Page 89: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-10

7.4 Task Program This section provides kind of user definition task and method of task program usage. See “7.2.1 Kind of task”, “7.2.2 Operation Type of Program” for initialization and error task.

7.4.1 Kind of Task Below table provides characters of Task.

Kind Spec

Positive period Task (Interval Task)

Outside Contact Task (Interrupt Task)

Inside Contact Task (Single Task)

Number 32 EA 16 EA 16 EA

Operation condition

Positive period Task (Cycle setting is available until max. 4294967.29 sec by 10ms unit)

Rising or falling edge of input contact of interrupt module

Rising edge of Bool parameter data among inside memory data (0->1)

Output and Operation

Perform periodically per setting time

Perform immediately when an error occurred at interrupt module contact

Perform with searching edge after completing scan program operation

Output delay time Delay max. 5ms

Delay max. 5ms + Delay interrupt module (within 0.5ms)

Delay as much as max. scan time

Performance priority

0~7 level setting (the order of priority of 0 level is first)

0~7 level setting (the order of priority of 0 level is first)

0~7 level setting (the order of priority of 0 level is first)

Task Num. User assign to not overlap among 0~31

User assign to not overlap among 32~47

User assign to not overlap among 48~63

7.4.2 Processing of Task Program This section provides common processing method and Remarks pertaining to Task Program Process.

7.4.2.1 Characteristics of Task Program

Task Program doesn’t repeat process for every scan like scan program and run when operation condition occurred. Consider this when making task program. For instance if using timer and counter at Positive period Task Program of 10 sec cycle, error of this timer can be max 10 sec. Changed input within 10 sec is not counted because the counter checks the input status of the counter per 10 sec.

7.4.2.2. Performance of Task

Makes new occurred task not interrupt during operating of program block at redundant system. Processes high priority task program among standby task at end point of program block that is running

Page 90: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-11

• Ends running task and performs standby task during operating task program. • Performs with checking standby task whenever each program block ends during operating scan program

1) Performance delay of standby task during operating scan program

Correct control can not be expected by task program if running time of scan program is longer than running delay allowance time of task required at control system. Use the following method to reduce standby time of task.

• Divide Scan Program in to several program blocks by function. • If program cannot be divided, insert “standby task processing function (SYNC)” by proper interval in program and perform task that is waiting. Total scan time increases due to SYNC function running so Insert necessary minimum quantity

• Total scan time increases as much as task program running time in one scan. Therefore in case of positive period task, setting short cycle more than necessary is not allowed.

2) Standby task running delay during task program running Consider relation between tasks because of running standby task after finishing task on operation during task program running.

• Configure the task program short to reduce other task standby time. Before running standby task, ignore the last occurred task if the same task is required • Determine priority of task per emergency of response by considering in case of various task running simultaneously required.

7.4.2.3 System operation and performance of task when instantaneous power failure

• User definition task doesn’t operate during initialization task program running. • When instantaneous power failure occurred within 20ms, after recovering power failure, perform a task that was waiting before power failure and a task that was occurred during power failure. Task that was occurred redundantly can be ignored. • In case of re-operation by Hot Restart, task that performed before power failure and standby task can be processed but interrupt task that was occurred during power failure or positive period task that was occurred redundantly during power failure will be ignored. • Ignore all tasks, which were occurred during power failure and standby task when re-running with cold or warm restart.

7.4.3 Processing of Positive period Task Program This section provides processing of task program if operation condition of task program is set by positive period 1) Setting item at task

Set running cycle of task that can be operation condition of running task program and priority.

2) Positive period Task Processing Perform positive period task process per setting time interval (performance cycle).

3) Precautions When using positive period task program • When positive period task program is currently running or waiting, if performance requirements of the same task program are occurred, new occurred task is ignored and task crush warning typical flag (_TASK_ERR) is reset. And related location of system error detail flag (TC_BMAP[n]) is marked and issued number of positive period task that performance requirement was ignored at related location of (_TC_CNT[n]) is recorded.

Page 91: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-12

Remarks

• When setting running cycle of positive period task program, consider that performance requirements of

various positive period task programs can be occurred simultaneously. If using 4 positive period task programs that each cycle is 2, 4, 10 and 20 sec. There can be some

problems such as scan time can extend momentary cause 4 performance requirements are occurred per 20 sec.

7.4.4 Processing of Outside Contact Task Program This section provides process method of task program in assigning the running condition of task program to Outside interrupt contact signal that is input at interrupt module. 1) Setting items at interrupt module

Set the rising and down edge to interrupt module by Dip switch in accordance with required condition of each contact.

2) Setting items at Task

Set contact number and priority of interrupt module to task that is identical the operating condition of running task program

Task number assigned automatically to manage task. Module contact number 0 1 2 3 ... 12 13 14 15

Task number 32 33 34 35 ... 44 45 46 47 3) Outside contact task process

When interrupt at interrupt module occurred by signal authorized from Outside, CPU module recognize this signal and task program that operated by contact occurred signal is performed.

4) Precautions when using Outside contact task program

• When task program that is operated by contact of interrupt module is running or standing by, if performance requirement of task program is occurred by the same contact, new occurred task will be ignored and Outside contact task that is occurred running requirement congestion and occurred number are recorded at task crush warning typical flag (_TASK_ERR) and system error detail flag (TC_BMAP[n]).

• Running requirement of task program can be accepted if operation mode is RUN mode. Running requirement occurred during operating on STOP mode is ignored totally.

7.4.5 Processing of Inside Contact Task Program This section provides process method of task program if setting operation condition of task program to contact of direct parameter (I, Q, M) or auto parameter. 1) Setting items at task

Set contact and priority that can be operation condition of performing task program. Confirm the task number for task management.

2) Inside contact point task process Check the status of the contacts that can be operation condition of inside contact task program and then perform the inside contact task programs occurred rising edge per priority after finishing performance of scan program at CPU module.

3) Precautions when using inside contact task program

Page 92: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-13

• Inside contact task program is performed after completing performance of scan program. Although performance condition of inside contact task program is occurred at scan program or task program (positive period, Outside contact), it is not performed immediately but performed after completing performance of scan program.

• Inside contact task checks at the completed performance point of scan program. Therefore if inside contact task performance condition is occurred and disappeared(if doing OFF→ON→OFF assigned contact) by scan program or task program (positive period, Outside contact) during “1 scan”, task doesn’t perform cause performance condition is not detected at performance condition checking point.

7.4.6 Verification of Task Program Verify below significant items after making task program. (1) Is the setting of the task proper?

Scan time will become longer or irregular if task occurs more than necessary or various tasks within one scan occur simultaneously. If task setting cannot be changed, check the setting value of the watchdog time with consideration of scan time that is possible to occur.

(2) Is the task priority well arranged?

Check the case of task required simultaneously and then recheck task priority with it.

(3) Do you make the task program short? If the performance time of the task program is long, it causes that scan time becomes longer or irregular or crush of task program can be occurred. Make the performance time short if it is possible.

(4) Is there any effective to other program due to performance result of task?

If scan program and task program share input image, direct parameter (%M) and global parameter, check that the process results of the task programs effect scan program. It has to be paid more attention, if using “standby task process function” or spiriting scan program.

Refer to “Example of Scan Time Calculation” of “7.8 Scan Time” for process speed of scan program and task program.

Page 93: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-14

7.4.7 Example of Program Configuration and Processing Register task and program as shown in the following, • Task Register : T_SLOW ( Interval := T#30ms, Priority := 2 ) PROC_1 ( Single := %MX0, Priority := 3 ) E_INT1 ( Interrupt:= 0, Priority := 1 ) • Program Registration : Program --> S0, S1, S2, S3,….., S9 (Scan) Program → P1 with task T_SLOW Program → P2 with task PROC_1 Program → P3 with task E_INT1 If the performance time of program is the same as the occurrence time of Outside interrupt, • Performance time of each program : S0,…,S9 = approximately 6ms, P1 = 4ms, P2 = 7ms, P3 = 1ms • Interrupt occurrence time of E_INT1: occurred at 22ms, 60ms, 94ms after operating • Occurrence of PROC_1: occurred during scan program the following is program performance.

Perform P3

Scan Start(Start initial operation)

0 20

PROC 1

E_INT1occurredTime : [mS]

End 1 scan(Start new scan)

End scanprogram

Perform P0

Perform P1

Perform P2

T_SLOWoccurred

S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S0End S1

3010 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

S2

Performance Process by time

0 ~ 19 [ms] : Start scan and then perform scan program S0,S1,S2,…in order. 20~29 [ms] : occurred Outside interrupt at 22ms but perform P3 at 25ms after completing S3. 30~59 [ms] : occurred Outside interrupt at 30ms but perform P1 after completing S4. 60~69 [ms] : occurred positive period and Outside interrupt simultaneously at 30ms but perform P3 and then P1 per priority after completing S8 performance. 70~79 [ms] : search inside contact and then perform P2 at S9 ending point that is last program block among scan program. 80~89 [ms] : Start process related system in accordance with scan end. 90~99 [ms] : stop contemporarily the end process per positive period interrupt requirement during system process and perform P1. And process the requirement of P3 after P3 completed and then perform the end process. 100~ [ms] : complete the lest of the end process and start new scan(106 ms )

Page 94: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-15

7.5 Timer/Counter

7.5.1 Timer Timer of PLC is Addition Timer that increases current value per measuring time. There are ON Delay

Timer (TON), OFF Delay Timer (TOF), Pulse Timer (TP), etc. Performance and output process of timer processed immediately when running a function block. Time

range can be measured from 0.001sec to 4294967.295sec (1193 hours) by 1ms unit. Refer to “GLOFA PLC command book” for detail instruction.

BOOL

TIME PT

IN Q

TON

BOOL

TIMEET

NAME

IN: Timer running condition PT: Preset Time Q : Output Contact ET: Elapsed Value

7.5.1.1 ON Delay Timer

Expiration time renewal of timer is performed when running timer function block (TP) and the contact of timer is ON as expiration time reaches at setting time (expiration time = setting time). Timing drawing of ON Delay Timer is as follows.

7.5.1.2 OFF Delay Timer

Output Contact (Q) is ON as input condition is ON. When input condition is OFF, start Expiration time renewal of timer. Expiration time renewal performs the timer function block and turn off the contact (Q) if expiration time reaches setting time (expiration time = setting time). Timing drawing of OFF Delay Timer is as follows.

t0

t4t3t2t1t0

t0+PT t1 t5t4+PT

t5t4t3t2t1

t5

IN

Q

PT

ET

Page 95: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-16

7.5.1.3 Pulse Timer

When input condition is ON, output contact (Q) is ON. Timer when performing timer function block (TON) and the output contact of timer is OFF as expiration time reaches at setting time (expiration time = setting time). Contact can be OFF after setting time expiration though input condition is OFF. Timing drawing of ON Delay Timer is as follows.

7.5.1.4 Timer Error

Timer error means the time from max. ‘1 scan time + scan start to timer function block performance’

PT

ET

t0

t5+PT

t5t3t1

t2t1+PTt0

t5t4t3t2t1

IN

Q

IN

Q

ET

PT

t0

t0 t0+PT

t5t4t3t2t1

t5t1

t4+PTt4t2+PT

t2 t4

t0

t2

Page 96: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-17

7.5.2 Counter The Counter of PLC CPU detects rising edge (OFF→ON) of input signal and increases current value. There are Counter Up (CTI), Counter Down (CTD), Counter Up/Down (CTUD), etc. for more details, see “GLOFA PLC command book”.

(1) Count up Counter increases current value. (2) Countdown Counter decreases current value. (3) Count up/down counter compares count value of two input conditions.

7.5.2.1 Count up Counter

There must be Input Condition (CU), Reset Condition (R) and Setting Value (PV).

Turn the output contact of counter ON if Current Value (CV) increases and then become the same as Setting Value (PV). When RESET signal input, current value become 0 and output contact (Q) become OFF.

7.5.2.2 Countdown Counter

There must be Input Condition (CU), Road (LD) and Setting Value (PV).

Turn the output contact (Q) of counter ON if Current Value (CV) decreases and then become 0. When LD signal input, current value become setting value and output contact (Q) become OFF.

7.5.2.3 Count Up/Down Counter

There must be two Input Conditions, RESET Condition, LD Condition and Setting Value (PV).

When RESET signal input, current value become 0.

When LD signal input, current value become setting value.

BOOL

BOOL

INT PV

R

CU Q

CV

CTU

BOOL

INT

NAME

B OO L

B OO L

B OO L

B OO L

I N T

C U

C D

R

L D

P V

Q U

Q D

C V

C TU D

B O O L

B O O L

I N T

N A M E

BOOL

BOOL

INT PV

LD

CD Q

CV

CTD

BOOL

INT

NAME

Page 97: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7-18

Current Value (CV) increases 1 at rising edge of CU and decreases 1 at rising edge of CD. QU is ON if Current Value (CV) is more than Setting Value (PV) and QD is ON if Current Value (CV) is less than or the same as 0.

7.5.2.4 Max Factor Speed of Counter

Max Factor Speed of Counter is determined by scan time and counter is available if each of ON time and OFF time of input condition is more than scan time. Duty n indicates ON and OFF time rates of input signal by %.

Remarks

OFF

ON

T1 T2

OFF

When T1 ≤ T2 n = T1+T2T1 X 100 [%]

When T1 > T2 n = T1 T2T2 X 100 [%]

Pulse InputOf Counter

M ax Factor Speed Cmax 100n

ts1

[tim es/s]n : Duty (% )

ts : Scan Tim e [s]X

Page 98: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-1

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.1 System Operation

8.1.1 Program Preparation (1) Program Preparation

Prepare the program using GMWIN. (For detailed, see ‘GMWIN User’s Manual’.)

(2) Program Transmission

• Transmit program to PLC using GMWIN. • Mount the memory module having operation program.

8.1.2 Operation Method For PLC operation, there are the following methods.

(1) Using Local Key:

Download the program in REM mode and then set Front key to ‘RUN’.

(2) Using GMWIN: Set Front Key to ‘REM’ and than select ‘RUN’ in ‘On-line Menu’.

(3) By Power Input: Set Front Key to ‘REM’ and power on. If key set to ‘REM’ and previously Remote ‘RUN’ mode, operation started immediately after power on.

(4) Restart using Reset Key: There are ‘RESEt’ and ‘OVERALL RESET’.

• RESET: Press and release RESET switch in front of CPU module. ‘rESEt’ will be displayed in front. Operates in the same operation with power ON/OFF.

• OVERALL RESET: If pressing RESET switch in front of CPU module more than 5 seconds, ‘rSt c’ will be displayed in front. If releasing switch, restarted with COLD RESTART.

8.1.3 Initial Operation This describes system setting and operation for initial operation of redundant system.

(1) According to I/O usage, set Switched I/O, Redundant I/O and Stand-alone I/O. (2) Prepare program block separately as shown in para. (1) if possible. (3) Set base as shown in para. (1).(Set in the unit of base in Redundant Parameter) Ex.) Base 0:Redundant, Base 1:Redundant Base 2:Switched, Base 3:Stand-alone (4) Set I/O redundant circuit in redundant parameter. (5) Complete configuration and then run compile. (6) Download the program into A Side. (7) With B Side stopped, run trial operation of A Side.

Page 99: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-2

(8) Set B Side at RUN and make it stand-by. (9) Stop A Side and run back up trial of B Side. (10) If necessary, save the program of each CPU at memory module. (11) Start normal operation as follows.

• Start first the side to be operated as master referring to ‘6.3 Redundant System Operation Mode’(this time, if Stnby displayed at CPU, restart using reset key) and after master started in normal operation, start standby side and make it redundant operation.

8.1.4 Operation Participation

8.1.4.1 Operation Participation

It means the state that standby is participated in redundant operation during operation of master. Standby is synchronized with master as follows.

(1) Initialization of CPU (2) Check of Redundant Composition (3) Transfer of invariable data from master (4) Transfer of variable data from master (5) Check of synchronization with master (6) Participating in operation at the same time with master

Remarks

• (1),(2),(3) are processed in separately to do within delay time of about 50ms at each scan of master. • (4),(5),(6) shall be processed within one scan of master and within delay time of max. 50 ms. (If operating variable exceeds the standard, its delay time may be over 50ms. See 8.5.3 Delay Time in Redundant Operation’.)

8.1.4.2 Standby Operation Participation Details

This describes the detailed operation when standby participated in .

(1) Power On • Check during operation of master • Standby Entry Mode • CPU Self Diagnosis • Transfer of program from master(write in RAM, Memory Module) (2) Check of Redundant Composition • Check Switched I/O Access • Transfer of switched I/O module information from master • Scan redundant I/O module information installed at standby side • Comparison with I/O parameter (3) Transfer of invariable data from master • Transfer of flag from master(if necessary, divided into several scans) • Check the flag not changed and then proceed to step (4) (4) Transfer of variable data from master • Some User Data area and system buffer

Page 100: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-3

(5) Check synchronization with master • Synchronizes the operation information in CPU. (6) Participation in operation at the same time with master • Run redundant operation from input refresh

8.1.5 Operation Condition

8.1.5.1 Normal Operation

• If power applied, master CPU module checks system configuration. If power applied late in extended base, front display shows checking base such as ‘Eb xx’ until power on. In STOP mode, an error occurred after 10 seconds’ wait.

• After modifying the program, initial operation starts in Cold Restart.

• When restarting the system stopped in normal operation, do as parameter setting. There are Mode key, GMWIN, Power OFF, and reset.

• If restarting the system of Warm Restart in Cold Restart Mode, Use Reset Key or ‘OVERALL RESET’ of GMWIN.

• If stopped by errors during operation, restart will be determined according to the type of error and remedy (See ‘Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting’).

8.1.5.2 If I/O Skip set

• Exclude skip setting module from the operation. Therefore skip troubleshooting. If skip released during operation, it will be included in operation normally. For details, see ‘9.2 I/O Skip’ and 9.3 ‘Module Replacement During Operation’.

8.1.5.3 If Trouble Mask set

• If trouble mask set, it will be included in operation. Perform troubleshooting. Continues to operate even if module type inconsistent error occurred in initial start. For details see ‘9.1 Trouble Mask’.

• If mask set at overall base with power off, CPU waits for power on in standby.

8.2 I/O Forced ON/OFF

8.2.1 Forced ON/OFF Setting • Set Forced On/Off in accordance with areas of Input (I) and Output (Q).

• Set Input and Output respectively and operate from when ‘Forced I/O Setting Permission’ set.

• If actual I/O module not mounted, setting is enabled. (For detailed information, see ‘GMWIN User’s Manual’.)

Page 101: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-4

8.2.2 Forced ON/OFF Processing Time and Method

8.2.2.1 Forced Input

• Input(I) updates Input(I) image area by replacing contact data set in Forced On/Off with forced data out of those read from input module at input refresh. User program runs the operation with forced data at forced contact.

• When setting forced input of input contact in triplex configuration, designate input position of redundant base.

Remarks

• If forcedly controlling the contact of switched base from triplex input, input value is not changed and an error detected in its contact. • If controlling the input used for system monitoring such as output feedback, system error can be occurred.

8.2.2.2 Forced Output

• Output(Q) outputs the data by replacing contact output set in Forced On/Off with forced data out of output image data having operation results at output refresh after a completion of user program operation. • Redundant output designates output position at redundant base and both of two outputs will be output simultaneously.

8.2.2.3 Forced On/Off Processing Area

• Input (I) and Output (Q) area for Forced On/Off is designated bigger than actual area. If designating remote I/O with this area, forced On/Off can be used equally with basic I/O area. Remarks

• In case of OFF -> ON, Operation Mode Change and Reset Key operation, forced On/Off setting data previously set is retained in PLC. • If program download and backup broken, forced On/Off setting data will be erased. On/Off setting data will be erased in operating program memory even if restarted with flash memory program. • To set new forced data from start, release all setting of Input and Output respectively using ‘ERASE’ key.

Page 102: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-5

8.3 Immediate I/O This can be used effectively when reading immediately input contact during program operation or outputting immediately operation results at output contact.

8.3.1 Immediate Input In case of Immediate Input, use 'DIREC_IN' function and if completed, Input (I) image area will be updated and applied immediately at subsequent operation.

8.3.2 Immediate Output In case of Immediate Output, use 'DIREC_O' function and if completed, Output(Q) image area data

will be immediately output at output module with operation results. Redundant output designates output position at redundant base and both of two outputs will be

output simultaneously.

8.3.3 Forced ON/OFF In case of forced I/O processing, forced On/Off setting is valid.

8.4 Memory Structure CPU module contains two kinds of memory available for users. One is program memory saving user’s program for establishing system and the other is data memory saving data during operation.

8.4.1 Program Memory Structure The following table describes items and size of program memory.

Item Size

Overall Program Memory Area 512kbyte System Area: • System Program • Back up

13kbyte

Parameter Area: • Basic Parameter • I/O Parameter • Highway Link Parameter • Interrupt Setting Information • Redundant Parameter

35kbyte

Program Area: • Scan program • Task program • User defined function/function block • Standard Library • Access Variable • Variable Initialization Information • Retained Variable Designation Information

464kbyte

Page 103: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-6

8.4.2 Data Memory Structure The following table describes items and size of data memory.

Item Size

Overall data memory Area 512kbyte System Area: • I/O Information Table • Forced I/O Table • Module Skip Table and etc.

50kbyte

System Flag Area 4,096byte

Input Image Area(%IX) 4,096byte

Output Image Area(%QX) 4,096byte

Direct Variable Area(%M) 0~64kbyte

Symbolic Variable Area (Max.) 256kbyte - Direct Variable Area

Redundant System Flag Area 254kbyte

Stack Area 4,096kbyte 1) System Area

Saves CPU module self-producing data for system management and system control data through GMWIN.

2) System Flag Area As saving area of user flag and system flag as shown in Chapter 11, users control this with flag name.

3) Input Image Area Where input data read from input module saved in automatically. Entire range between %IX0.0.0 and %IX63.7.63 but available between %IX0.0.0 and %IX15.7.63 for actual input module area. The area without actual module can be used freely in program. Especially, conveniently used to save data of remote input through highway link.

4) Output Image Area As memory of operation results, saved data will be output automatically through output module. Entire range between %QX0.0.0 and %QX63.7.63, but available between %QX0.0.0 and %QX15.7.63 for actual output module area. The area without actual module can be used freely in program. Especially, conveniently used to save data of remote output through highway link.

5) Direct Variable Area Where accessible to direct memory data through variable name previously designated by system such as %MX0, %MB0, %MW0, %MD0, %ML0, and etc. Users will set the capacity in ‘OPTION’ menu of GMWIN.

Page 104: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-7

6) Symbolic Variable Area

Variable made in programming by users, e.g. as data memory with name designated, there are general variable, global variable, and instance memory. The variable used in program block is located in ‘PB Instance Memory’ of desired program. One used in function block is located in ‘FB Instance Memory’. The max. size of PB instance memory is 32K Byte and if exceeding the max. size, program block can be divided and global variable used.

8.4.3 Resource Global Variable Processing

8.4.3.1 Resource Global Variable

Resource Global Variable means that sharable between programs and corresponds to Direct Variable and Symbolic Variable designated as Resource Global. These have one memory physically. That is, these are located in ‘Direct Variable Area(%M)’ and ‘Symbolic Variable Area’. Direct Variable can be used directly in each program and symbolic one used after designating those with the same name as ‘VAR-EXTERNAL’. Resource Global Variable can be written in applicable variable immediately when program performed. There are no problem between programs in scan task while processing sequentially, there may be confusion of data due to intervention of task program while running scan program. Take considerations of the followings in programming.

(1) When using resource global variable, don’t ‘Write’ the same variable in more than two task programs. In other words, do ‘write’ in one task and ‘read’ in required location unconditionally.

(2) When doing program block, save the value of global variable in Local Variable and then do program using Local Variable value. Then, homogeneous data will be hold in program block even if global variable value changed by task during program operation.

Page 105: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-8

8.5 Scan Time This means the time elapsed after scan program of one time until restarting of scan program.

8.5.1 Scan Time Calculation Scan Time means the sum between processing times of user’s scan and task programs and PLC internal processing time. Scan time is calculated as shown in the following equation.

8.5.1.1 Scan Time Calculation Equation

• Scan Time = Scan Program Processing Time + Task Program Processing Time + PLC internal processing time • Scan Program Processing Time = Processing time of user’s program not designated as Task Program • Task Program Processing Time = Sum of task program processing time treated for one scan • PLC Internal Processing Time = Self diagnosis time + I/O refresh time + internal data processing time + Communication service processing time

Scan time can be varied greatly due to task program operation, I/O redundant composition and communication data treatment.

Remarks • Scan Time can be increased excessively when standby system participated in operation. • Scan Time is longer than stand-alone operation during redundant operation.

8.5.1.2 Scan Time Related Flag

Scan Time is saved in system flag area. • _SCAN_MAX : Max. Scan Time (1ms Unit) • _SCAN_MIN : Min. Scan Time (1ms Unit) • _SCAN_CUR : Current Scan Time (1ms Unit) To measure processing time of task program for calculating scan time, enter task number to be measured in '_STSK_NUM' of system operation information flag in Variable Monitor Mode and monitor '_STSK_MAX, _STSK_MIN, and _STSK_CUR'.

8.5.1.3 Ex. Of Scan Time Calculation

In case of users program structure as shown below (see 7.4.7), how to calculate max. scan time is as follows. • Task: T_SLOW ( Interval := T#30ms, Priority := 2, Task No. : 0 ) PROC_1 ( Single := %MX0, Priority := 3, Task No.:48 ) E_INT1 ( Interrupt:= 0, Priority := 1, Task No.:32 )

Page 106: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-9

• Program : Program --> S0, S1, S2, S3,…,S9 (Scan) Program --> P1 with task T_SLOW Program --> P2 with task PROC_1 Program --> P3 with task E_INT1

(1) With only scan program(S0,…S9) run excepting task program, measure scan time (_SCAN_MAX) while doing communication service through communication module and monitor through GMWIN.

(2) To measure running time of positive period program, start program including positive period task program, register '_STSK_NUM, _STSK_MAX, _STSK_MIN, _STSK_CUR' flag in GMWIN Variable Monitor Mode, enter Task Number ‘0’ at '_STSK_NUM’ and then measure the value of ‘_STSK_MAX’.

(3) Start the program including single task program, enter task number ‘48’ at '_STSK_NUM’, start task in GMWIN (1->%MX0), and then measure the value of _STSK_MAX’.

(4) Start the program including interrupt task program, enter task number ‘32’ at '_STSK_NUM’, turn ON the input of interrupt module, and then measure the value ‘_STSK_MAX’. If the max. run time being Tscan(S0~S9) = 80 ms, Tp1 = 4 ms, Tp2 = 7 ms,

(5) Tp3 = 1 ms, basic san time will be 87 msec (Tscan + Tp2) if single task started during program operation and scan time be 95 msec(Tscan + Tp2 + Tp1 x 2) with two times positive period occurred. If external task occurred three times, scan time will be 98 msec(Tscan + Tp2 + Tp1 x 2 + Tp3 x 3) and max. scan time be 102 msec(Tscan + Tp2 + Tp1 x 3 + Tp3 x 3) with positive period run once more. If external task can be occurred within 102 msec, add its processing time and review the number positive period occurred. (See 7.4.7 Ex. Of Program Composition and Processing’ timing diagram)

8.5.2 Scan Watchdog Timer (1) Scan Watchdog Timer is used to detect operation delay due to an error of users program. Detection time of Scan Watchdog Timer is set at basic parameter. (2) Scan Watchdog Timer monitors Scan Elapsed Time during operation and if sensing excessive detection time, PLC immediately stops operation and perform the followings.

Overall Output OFF Set Error LED of CPU Module to ‘ON’ Display ‘E 040’ at 7 segment of CPU Module. (3) If Scan Watchdog time is expected to exceed in a specific program process during user’s program operation, use ‘WDT_RST’ function. If ‘WDT_RST’ function started, initialize the elapsed time of watchdog timer and restart from 0. (4) Power Input, Manual Reset Switch or Mode Change to STOP can be used to exit scan error.

Page 107: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-10

8.5.3 Delay Time in Redundant Operation

8.5.3.1 Delay Time in Redundant Operation Entry

To entry redundant operation among single operations, scan time will be increased excessively when standby CPU activated. Not increased over 50ms during program transmission. Can be increased over 50ms as long as data transmitted as a package. If the sum of symbolic variable and %M area setting being within 10K byte, delay time can be within 50ms and increased about 2ms per 1K byte if exceeded.

8.5.3.2 Scan Time in Redundant Operation

Scan time can be increased in redundant operation basically compared with single operation and greatly increased according to simultaneous operating number within one scan of special module FB and communication FB. Communication FB can choose sequential operating method.

Remarks

Scan Time will be increased excessively to entry Redundant Operation from Single when standby CPU activated.

8.6 RTC : Real Time Clock This PLC CPU module is basically mounted with RTC. RTC provides ‘Time Display Flag’ available in program and displays the time on Fault Report. It also provides hot restart time measuring when Hot Restart used. In case of a power failure more than 20ms or Power OFF, clock continues operation by battery back up. RTC time value updates at system flag area every scan. RTC time value is enabled in Read/Write through GMWIN (See ‘PLC Information’ of ‘On-line’ Menu of GMWIN).

8.6.1 RTC Internal Data Built-in Clock IC has the characteristics as shown in the following table.

Item Data

Year 4 digits in solar calendar

Month 1 ~ 12

Day 1 ~ 31

Hour 0 ~ 23 (24 hours)

Min. 0 ~ 59

Sec. 0 ~ 59 1/100 seconds 0 ~ 99

Day of the Week 0 ~ 6 (Monday ~ Sunday)

Page 108: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-11

If using time in Operation Program, do programming using User Flag ‘_RTC_DATE’, ‘_RTC_TOD’, ‘_RTC_WEEK’ available in the above table. It can be used in system control such as Start/Stop and Time Stamp of operation history, and etc. ‘_RTC_TIME[n]’, provided as system flag, is provided in BCD form to facilitate data transfer to simple display device or the equipment where time data type not handled.

8.6.2 RTC Time Error There can be errors of the max. ‘±5 seconds/1 month’ according to operating environment of PLC.

Remarks

If battery back up stooped more than 30 min., RTC may stop its operation. Time data was not set when the product purchased. Set and then use time data in system setup. If writing time data in RTC besides the range specified in the above table, it doesn’t operate normally.

( Ex. : 13 Month 32 Day 28 Hour ) If RTC error found, _RTC_ERR of system flag _CNF_WAR turns ON.

If RTC error corrected, _RTC_ERR of system flag _CNF_WAR turns OFF(For error of RTC by CPU, see _CNF_A,B_WAR 의 _RTC_A_ERR, _RTC_B_ERR). RTC stop or error can be occurred due to battery error and etc. If writing new time value in RTC, RTC error

will be resolved.

8.7 Precautions when using special module

GLOFA system provides convenience and high performance of program compared with the previous method when using special module. Take some precautions when establishing the system. Make you understood what the following describes and review the applicable system.

8.7.1 Special Module Programming To make the program simple and prevent programming error, it is provided with function block in separately at each special module.

(1) Function block takes a role as interface between data of users program and special module,

monitors the operation of special module, and displays errors. Special error detection program is not required.

(2) Function block consists of ones for ‘initialization’ and ‘controlling’ the operation of special module.

(3) Function block is provided with one for single module(attached to switched base) and for redundant module(attached to redundant base) according to mounting method.

Remarks

For detailed function block, see ‘Appendix 2.3 Special module function block table’ of this manual and user’s manual of special module.

Page 109: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-12

8.7.2 Special Module Initialization To define the operation characteristics of special module, do program using ‘Initialization’ function block. Generally, data range, resolution and filtering for channels are designated. You have only do once when starting system.

(1) When system started, initialization shall be completed before master CPU performs scan

program and so done in restart program (initialization task program). But function block required to change set data during operation can be done in general program.

(2) Standby CPU doesn’t perform initialization program. Special module, which is located at redundant base and controlled by standby CPU among redundant special modules, performs module initialization in the method of automatically transferring the information of special module to master.

Remarks

• Special module of switched base can cause errors in a power failure of applicable extended base unit. If programming to override errors and proceeds to operation, special module can be restarted using GMWIN after a recovery of power(See ‘Special Module Initialization’ of 9.3.3 Switched Base Replacement’.

8.7.3 Special Module Control To control the operation of special module, do programming using function block to be controlled for each module. This can be done regardless of the position of program. But it is recommended to handle input and output with one function block through overall scan program for efficient system management and use data memory for operation inside of system.

(1) Control of Single Module • Special Module attached to Switched Base has the same external connection and program method with that of single system. (2) Control of Redundant Module

• Analogue output module has the same program method with that of single system. For connection method and use, see ’10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module’.

• Function block for analogue input module provides both two input data. Check module state, channel state and data value and choose one selectively on the program. For connection method and use, see ’10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module’.

Remarks

• It is recommended to use array type function block rather than single channel to minimize the scan time. • If using hot restart, output the standard of STOP mode until new data used in the program. If writing every scan data in special module, immediately normal output can be done. But when output data value changed or written periodically, standard output can be done until that time. To keep the continuity of output, it is recommended to output the data one time in hot restart program after initialization of special module.

8.7.4 Module Replacement During Operation If replacing extended base or module during system operation, the initialization of special module and data recovery is enabled using GMWIN. If a failure of extended base or power OFF, the system continues operation normally and proceeds to operation without restart of CPU module in ON->OFF->ON(See ‘9.3 Module Replacement during Operation’).

Page 110: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-13

8.8 How to Use Memory Module This describes how to retain memory and how to mount memory module and operate PLC. This PLC uses Flash Memory as memory module. Memory Module is enabled in read/write with mounted at CPU module without special write-dedicated equipment.

8.8.1 How to Write User’s Program in Memory Module Always turn off the power when mounting memory module at CPU module.

8.8.1.1 Writing in Master CPU

This describes how to write user’s program in Memory Module.

8.8.1.2 Writing to Standby CPU

If standby CPU started while running master CPU, standby CPU receives the program from master and if memory module mounted in standby CPU, run memory module write automatically.

Remarks

• When mounting memory module to write user’s program in it, its contents can be transferred to program area if power applied in Run Mode. • You can download the program for upload with capacity more than that of program memory of CPU module using GMWIN. This time, it is recommended to use memory module with capacity of 2Mbyte more than that of program memory. • During program debugging, operate without memory module and after a completion of debugging, mount with memory module.

Initiation

Change the operation mode into Remote STOP and then turn Off

Power Off

Mount the connector with memory module of CPU module.

Mount Memory

Power On

Select Flash Memory Write in GMWIN. (As the command to write the contents of program memory in memory module, there should be memory program).

End

Run

Page 111: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-14

8.8.2 How to operate using Memory Module (1) Always turn OFF when mounting memory module at CPU module. (2) User’s program saved in memory module starts operation after moved to program memory of CPU module when operation mode changed to RUN by Power ON or Mode Change. Used in preparation of data loss of program RAM in CPU Module.

8.8.2.1 How to Operate

This describes how to operate using memory module.

Initiation

Power OFF After changed to STOP mode in operation mode

Power Off

Mount memory module with user’s program saved at mounting connector of CPU module.

Mount Memory

Run write of memory module if mounting memory module without program.

Power On

Change operation mode to RUN mode.

Change Operation

Check changed program run.

END

Check

Page 112: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-15

8.9 Flag For displaying outside fault This flag is provided for users to detect fault of outside equipment and perform system stop and warning. If using this flag, outside fault will be displayed without complex program and fault position be monitored without special device(GMWIN and etc.) or source program.

8.9.1 Detection and Classification of Outside Fault Outside fault can be detected by user’s program and classified into Heavy fault(error), which stops PLC operation according to detected fault, and light fault(warning), which continues operation of PLC and only displays fault state. ANC_ERR[n] flag will be used in heavy fault and ANC_WB[n] flag used in light fault.

8.9.2 Heavy Fault of Outside Equipment When heavy fault detected in user’s program, if classifying user’s defined error type and writing the value excepting 0 in system flag _ANC_ERR[n], a fault displayed in ANNUN_ER of CNF_ER, representative system error flag, when a completion of scan program. Then, PLC turns off all output modules and becomes an error equally with PLC self-detection. In case of fault, users can find the cause of fault using GMWIN or by monitoring ANC_ERR[n] flag. ANC_ERR[n] has 16(n : between 0 and 15) fields and classifies fault status greatly. If is able to write fault number designated temporarily by users in each field and the number can be between 1 and 65,535.

Ex.) Error Detection MOVE 10 _ANC_ERR[0]

8.9.3 Light fault of Outside Equipment When light fault detected in user’s program, turns On the flag of desired position according to the usage out of system flag ANCWB[n]. When a completion of scan program, search from ANC_WB[0] and in case of warning, it will be displayed in ANNUNWR of CNFWAR, system warning representative flag, and light fault number of outside equipment will be written from ANCWAR[0] to ANCWAR[7] according to occurrence order. In case of warning, users can find the cause of fault using GMWIN or by monitoring ANCWAR[n] and ANCWB[n] flag. If light fault removed from outside equipment, e.g. after a completion of user’s program, those removed from _ANC_WB[n] will be automatically deleted from _ANC_WAR[n] flag and if all removed, _ANNUN_WR display of system flag _CNF_WAR will be reset. Ex.) Error Detection _ANC_WB[10]

Page 113: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-16

-- Ex. Of Light Fault Detection and Flag Display of Outside Equipment --

During user’s program operation, if system error detected with user’s program and set _ANC_WB[10] to ON, complete operating scan, and _ANNUN_WR 과 _ANC_WAR[0..7] will be shown as in the left. After the next scan completed, if Nos. 1, 2, 3, 10, 15, 40, 50, 60, and 75 set to ON, _ANC_WAR[n] will be shown as in the left. No. 10 has lower priority than Nos. 1, 2, and 3, but set to ON in the previous scan(occurred in advance), so it will be written before _ANC_WAR[n]. Although _ANC_WB[75] set to ON, the warning occurred in advance will not be displayed due to _ANC_WAR[n] full. After the next scan completed, if Nos., 2, 3, 15, 40, 50, 60, 75 set to ON, _ANC_WAR[n] will be shown as in the left. Because No. 10 warning removed, it will be deleted from _ANC_WAR[0] and the content of _ANC_WAR[1..7] be get ahead of. After data moved, _ANC_WAR[7] will be empty and _ANC_WB[75] be written in _ANC_WAR[7]. If all warnings displayed in _ANC_WB[n] during operation, _ANNUN_WR and _ANC_WAR[n] will be shown as in the left.

Remarks

When light error detected, error will not be displayed in CPU Module.

_ANNUN_WR = 1 _ANC_WAR[0] = 10

_ANC_WAR[1] = 0 _ANC_WAR[2] = 0 _ANC_WAR[3] = 0 _ANC_WAR[4] = 0 _ANC_WAR[5] = 0 _ANC_WAR[6] = 0 _ANC_WAR[7] = 0

_ANNUN_WR = 1 _ANC_WAR[0] = 10

_ANC_WAR[1] = 1 _ANC_WAR[2] = 2 _ANC_WAR[3] = 3 _ANC_WAR[4] = 15 _ANC_WAR[5] = 40 _ANC_WAR[6] = 50 _ANC_WAR[7] = 60

_ANNUN_WR = 1 _ANC_WAR[0] = 1

_ANC_WAR[1] = 2 _ANC_WAR[2] = 3 _ANC_WAR[3] = 15 _ANC_WAR[4] = 40 _ANC_WAR[5] = 50 _ANC_WAR[6] = 60 _ANC_WAR[7] = 75

_ANNUN_WR = 0 _ANC_WAR[0] = 0

_ANC_WAR[1] = 0 _ANC_WAR[2] = 0 _ANC_WAR[3] = 0 _ANC_WAR[4] = 0 _ANC_WAR[5] = 0 _ANC_WAR[6] = 0 _ANC_WAR[7] = 0

Page 114: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-17

8.10 Operation in Instantaneous Power Failure CPU Module detects instantaneous power failure when input power off or the voltage of input power lower than the specified. If CPU detected instantaneous power failure, perform operations as follows.

8.10.1 Instantaneous Power Failure less than Permissible 20ms (1) If instantaneous power failure detected, temporarily stop operation with output state remained. (2) If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation. (3) When instantaneous power failure occurred within 20ms, operation delay time will be ‘power failure

time +8~20ms’. Also if instantaneous power failure released, restart operation after delay of 16 to 28 ms for input normalization of AC input.

(4) If operation stopped due to instantaneous power failure, scan watchdog timer continues counting. For example, If 15ms instantaneous power failure occurred with scan watchdog time set to 200ms and scan time to 190ms, scan watchdog time error will be occurred. (5) If operation stopped due to instantaneous power failure, timer counting and positive interrupt timer

counting continues operation(For task in instantaneous power failure, see 7.4.2.3 System Start and Task Performance in instantaneous power failure).

8.10.2 Instantaneous Power Failure Exceeding Permissible 20 ms When a power failure more than 20ms occurred, PLC will be restarted. Power module can supply CPU module with normal DC power up to 20ms after AC_Fail. This time, CPU module keeps stop and output state. If AC power not recovered for 20ms, CPU module turns off output and becomes in standby. In subsequent power recovery, restart operation as in normal power on.

END 00 END END0

Power Failure Power Recovery

Power Failure within 20msCPU holds output andTemporarily stop operation

END 00

Power FailureOutput OFF

20msAfter a power failure more than

20ms, turn OFF output and stop

operation.

Power Recovery

Restart

Page 115: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-18

8.10.3 Instantaneous Power Failure During Redundant Operation Factors of instantaneous power failure are as follows in redundant system.

(1) Instantaneous power failure of master CPU (2) Instantaneous power failure of standby CPU (3) Instantaneous power failure of extended base

8.10.3.1 Power Failure of Master CPU

• If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation. • If power failure not recovered exceeding 20ms, master stops operation and standby CPU is switched to master to proceed to operation

8.10.3.2 Power Failure of Standby CPU

• If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation. • If power failure not recovered exceeding 20ms, master proceeds to operation and standby CPU stops operation.

8.10.3.3 Simultaneous Power Failure of Master/Standby CPU

• If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation. • If power failure not recovered exceeding 20ms, overall redundant system stop operation. • When power recovered, the power of master shall be recovered to restart system.

8.10.3.4 Power Failure of Extended Base

• To prevent abnormal input and output even in instantaneous power failure of extended base, stops operation and monitors instantaneous power failure as in CPU power failure.

• Power Failure of Extended Base : If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation and if not recovered exceeding 20ms, stops operation.

• Power Failure of Redundant Base(Only one side): If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation and if not recovered exceeding 20ms, excludes the base and proceeds to operation

• Power Failure of Redundant Base(Both side):: If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation and if not recovered exceeding 20ms, stops operation.

• If power recovered in extended base after instantaneous power failure exceeding 20ms, system will be restarted.

Remarks

If instantaneous power failure occurred in redundant system, its operation will be delayed about 20ms to detect the fault.

Page 116: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8-19

8.11 History Log-In There are error history, power off history, redundant operation mode change history and operation mode change of respective CPU. Each history can be saved up to the latest 16(For detailed, see 11.5 System Error and Warning Detailed Flag and ‘PLC Information’ in GMWIN User’s Manual).

8.11.1 History Log-in and Content (1) Error History (_ERR_HIS[n]) • Log-in : When error occurred during operation • Content : Occurred time, error code (2) Power Off History (_AC_F_TM[n], _AC_F_CNT) • Log-in : When power off occurred in RUN mode • Content : Occurred time(16), Occurred number(1) (3) Redundant Operation Mode Change History (_RED_HIS[n]) • Log-in: When redundant operation mode changed • Content : Occurred time, Changed redundant operation mode, restart mode (4) CPU Operation Mode Change History (_MODE_A_HIS[n], _MODE_B_HIS[n]) • Log-in: When each CPU mode changed • Content : Occurred time, Changed CPU operation mode, restart mode

8.11.2 Reset of Saved Information It will not be deleted until doing in the menu of GMWIN.

Page 117: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-1

Chapter 9. Error Remedy 9.1 Fault Mask

9.1.1 Usage and Operation of Fault Mask Fault Mask is used to override and proceed to operation of program if fault occurred in designated module or base during operation. Module or Base designated with fault mask performs update of normal I/O data and trouble check until fault occurred. If fault occurred in module or base with fault mask set during operation, CPU module flickers front display and program proceeds to operation. It will not be displayed in error representative flag and GMWIN. If detailed flag monitored in the area with fault mask set, error can be found.

9.1.2 How to Set Fault Mask (1) Fault Mask is able to be set for fault of module or base and user defined error(_ANNUN_ER). (2) Module fault mask can be set directly by GMWIN on-line menu(fault mask setting) or user’s program and by parameter in ‘Redundant Parameter’ setting menu of programming. (3) 12-slot base can be recognized as subsequent 2 base, so all of two base areas should be set.

9.1.3 By Flag Fault Mask Flag can be preset before error occurred and set by error task program started when error occurred.(See ‘System Fault Mask Flag’). Remarks

• If removing cause of errors without error flag deleted in CPU module, system stops operation. Before releasing of fault mask flag, check error flag.

9.1.4 By Parameter In programming, it can be set in parameter, compiled with program, and then downloaded. Parameter setting will be copied to fault mask flag in first initialization of system after download of program. In spite of parameter setting, flag can be changed using flag control during operation.

Remarks

• Modules set in Redundant Base continues operation if any one failed. When corresponding two modules failed, to continue operation, set fault mask. • When Power OFF->ON, Operation Mode changed and Reset Key operated, fault mask setting data set previously would be retained and performed in PLC. It is able to be deleted using GMWIN or program. • Data of Fault Mask flag are updated with parameter data as follows. 1) Restart operation after download of program using GMWIN 2) If operating program memory has different program with flash memory module and restarts operation with memory module program loaded into program memory. 3) If memory backup broken due to drop of battery voltage

Page 118: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-2

9.2 I/O Skip(I/O Module, Extended Base Operation Miss Designated)

9.2.1 Usage and Operation of I/O Skip I/O skip function excludes the designated module and base from operation. Designated module and base stops trouble check and update of I/O data from the time designated. It can be used for replacing base during operation and temporary operation with fault excluded from. For module replacement, see 9.3 Module Replacement during Operation.

9.2.2 I/O Skip Setting and I/O Data Processing (1) Skip can be set in the unit of module or base. It is set in on-line menu(I/O Skip) of GMWIN. For detailed, see ‘GMWIN User’s Manual’.

(2) 12-slot base can be recognized as subsequent 2 base, so all of two base areas should be set.

(3) Input(I) Image stops input refresh and keeps previous value of skip setting. But, image control is valid by Forced On/Off. Actual output of output module turns OFF in skip setting, but output(Q) image varies to the operation

of user’s program regardless of skip setting. Output value control of output module is disabled after skip setting.

(4) Skip function will be run equally when immediate I/O function used. Remarks

• When Power OFF->ON, Operation Mode changed and Reset Key operated, skip setting data set previously would be retained and performed in PLC. Skip function is able to be released using GMWIN or program. • Skip setting data are deleted if any of the following occurred. 1) If restarting operation after download of program using GMWIN 2) If operating program memory has different program with flash memory module and restarts operation with memory module program loaded into program memory. 3) If memory backup broken due to drop of battery voltage

9.2.3 Application to Redundant System When installing in Redundant Base, Both of A-side and B-side can be set and only one as required.

Page 119: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-3

9.3 Module Replacement During Operation

9.3.1 General of Module Replacement During Operation Module Replacement can be varied in accordance the position of module to be replaced during redundant operation. It is divided into switched base and redundant base. First check the followings when replacing the module (1) If stopping CPU system and replacing module,

When any CPU stopped, check there is no error or warning at the side to perform one-sided operation. For example, in case of abnormal communication line at the side to operate, communication can be disconnected when changed into One-Sided Operation. (2) If using I/O redundancy

If stopping some or overall faulty equipment, first check for abnormal. Check there is no contact error in switched base or the part performing one-sided operation during output. If no error in contact of switched base, first resolve the fault of switched base prior to repair of redundant base. REMARK

• In GMR Redundant system, it is possible to replace the module during operation. But special precautions should be taken that it can cause mis-operation of overall system. • 12-slot base can be recognized as subsequent 2 bases, so skip and fault mask should be set for all of two base areas. • Always set fault mask sequentially during replacement to prevent mis-operation of replaced module or overall system.

9.3.2 Replacement of CPU redundancy Stop operation of desired CPU system and then replace CPU redundant.

9.3.2.1 Replacement Sequences of CPU Module, Communication Module, Remote Interface Module

Using mode key of DIFA module, set CPU as one-sided operation to continue operation and exclude CPU to be replaced from operation. (2) Turns off the side to be replaced. (3) Replace CPU Module, Communication Module, Interface Module, or Power Module. (4) Supply power and check each module for normal operation. (5) Check the version of added module matched with operating system(redundant operation enable). (6) Set mode key of DIFA module to A+B and redundant operation.

Page 120: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-4

9.3.2.2 Replacement Sequences of DIF Module

(1) Set mode key of DIFA Module to one-sided operation of CPU to continue operation. Open the cover at the right of base and connect the power of base with that of DIF module(This time, power module of B side should be keep in normal operation). (3) Pull out DIF module. (4) Connect power terminal to DIF module to be replaced and insert base. (5) Restart stopped CPU, and then check each modules for normal operation. (6) Set DIFA key to A+B and redundant operation.

9.3.2.3 Repair of Base

(1) Using DIF key, set CPU as one-sided operation to continue operation and exclude CPU to be repaired from operation. (2) Turn off the side to be replaced and remove modules from base. (3) Replace IC mounted at base. (4) Mount modules, supply power, and then check each module for normal operation. Set Mode Key of DIFA module to A+B and redundant operation. Remarks

• When CPU stopped, attached communication and I/O system stopped simultaneously. Check there is no error in remaining CPU communication and I/O system.

9.3.3 Replacement of Switched Base Replace module without stopping operation of CPU in Switched Base.

9.3.3.1 Module Replacement After Base Operation Stopped

(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN. (To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems regardless of master CPU. (2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN. (3) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module(receiver) to ‘N’. (4) Turns off the base. (5) Replace module. (6) Reapply the power. (7) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module(receiver) to ‘Y’. (8) Perform initialization in GMWIN if special module located in the base. (9) Release skip setting of the base in GMWIN. (10) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’). If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1). (11) Release fault mask and return to normal operation. Remarks

• If power down without switch control of interface module, overall system becomes AC_Fail state. Take precautions of it.

Page 121: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-5

9.3.3.2 Module Replacement after Module Operation Stopped(Digital Module)

When replacing the module in certain operation, exceptional working is enabled as follows.

1) Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module. (1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN. (To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems regardless of master CPU. (2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN. (3) Replace module. (4) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN. (5) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’). If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1). (6) Release fault mask and return to normal operation. Remarks

• In these procedures, I/O module operated in the same base can cause wrong data instantaneously. • Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault mask at overall base.

2) Digital Module Replacement of the Base that consisted of combined Special Module Replace as in the above (1) ‘Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module’. Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal operation.

3) Replacement of Special Module. (1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN. (To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems regardless of master CPU. (2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN. (3) Replace module. (4) Perform initialization in GMWIN for replaced module. (5) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN. (6) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’). If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1). (7) Release fault mask and return to normal operation. Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal operation.

Page 122: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-6

9.3.3.3 Initialization of Special Module

Special Module is provided with channel initialization. If only special module required to be restarted during overall system operation, perform initialization of applicable module in GMWIN. Some module excepting A/D, D/A, TC, RTD is disavailable for initialization.

(1) Perform initialization in the point of ‘Initialization of Special Module’.

(2) Select ‘Special Module Initialization’ in on-line menu of GMWIN and perform initialization as shown in the following.

• Select Module: Designate the position of module to be initialized. When starting system, normally checked module displays Initialization Screen. When restarting with module removed(E30 occurred) or when mounting new module not in I/O parameter, initialization is disabled.

• Initialize Module : Set the same value with initial one designated in ‘Initialization Function Block’ of program using key. • If necessary, write D/A output data directly in module.

9.3.4 Replacement of Redundant Base There are several replacement methods for redundant base.

9.3.4.1 Replacement Procedures after CPU system stopped

(1) Using DIF key, set CPU as one-sided operation to continue operation and exclude CPU to be replaced from operation. (2) Turns off the side to be replaced. (3) Replace CPU Module, Communication Module, Interface Module, or Power Module. (4) Turn on the base, restart desired CPU, and check it for normal operation. (5) Set DIF key to A+B and redundant operation Remarks

• When CPU stopped, attached communication and I/O system stopped simultaneously. Check there is no error in remaining CPU communication and I/O system.

9.3.4.2 Module Replacement Procedures after stopping operation of the base to be replaced

(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN. (If replacement module belong to A CPU system, set only A and if belonged to B CPU, only B). (2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN. (3) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module to ‘N’. (4) Turns off the base. (5) Replace module. (6) Reapply the power. (7) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module to ‘Y’. (8) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN. (9) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’). If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1). (10) Release fault mask and return to normal operation. Remarks

• If power down without switch control of interface module, overall system becomes AC_Fail state. Take precautions of it.

Page 123: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-7

9.3.4.3 Module Replacement after Module Operation Stopped(Digital Module)

When replacing the module in certain operation, exceptional working is enabled as follows.

1) Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module. (1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN. (If replacement module belong to A CPU system, set only A and if belonged to B CPU, only B). (2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN. (3) Replace module. (4) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN. (5) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’). If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1). (6) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• In these procedures, I/O module operated in the same base can cause wrong data instantaneously. • Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault mask at overall base.

2) Digital Module Replacement of the Base that consisted of combined Special Module Replace as in the above (1) ‘Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module’. Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal operation.

3) Replacement of Special Module (1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN. (To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems regardless of master CPU. (2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN. (3) Replace module. (4) Perform initialization in GMWIN for replaced module. (5) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN. (6) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’). If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1). (7) Release fault mask and return to normal operation. Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal operation.

4) Initialization of Special Module • If replacing with faulty CPU off, read default from operating special module and perform initialization automatically. • If replacing with I/O partially off, see 9.3.3. Initialization of Special Module.

Page 124: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-8

9.4 Error Remedy

9.4.1 Segment of Errors Errors consists of error due to H/W failure of PLC, system configuration error, operation results error, and etc. When errors occurred, operation stops(see Chap. 13 Troubleshooting), operation can be continued by flag setting and error program.

(1) PLC Hardware Error

(2) System Configuration Error (3) Operation Error of User’s Program (4) Error detected by User’s Program

9.4.2 Standard Error Remedy When an error occurred, PLC system records error content in flag and continues or stops operation in accordance with error content and parameter setting. If an error occurred corresponding to ‘System Error Flag’ after scan program performed, system automatically performs error remedy program. Users can take an action against errors by making error remedy program and parameter. If error remedy program not prepared, it is standard to stop operation when errors occurred. (1) PLC Hardware Error

If hardware error occurred in CPU module, power module, and etc., system stops operation.

(2) System Configuration Error It is occurred when hardware configuration different between PLC and software. If errors occurred, system stops operation.

(3) Operation Error of User’s Program Errors occurred during user’s program operation could cause operation error to be displayed in error flag and continue operation. If operation time exceeds scan watchdog time or attached I/O module controlled normally, system stops operation.

(4) Error detected by User’s Program Errors occurred in external control equipment and detected by user’s program. If errors detected, system stops operation.

9.4.3 How to change by users If the above errors occurred, users can change operation using error operation program, fault mask parameter and flag control through program tool to do in the method besides standard. (1) PLC Hardware Error

If hardware error occurred and CPU module, power module, and etc. not operated normally, system can’t change the operation.

Page 125: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-9

(2) System Configuration Error

Error occurred when hardware configuration different between PLC and software. If errors occurred in initial check of cold and warm restart, system stops operation. If configuration changed such as module loss during operation but flag mask flag set to desired slot, it continues operation.

(3) Operation Error of User’s Program Errors occurred during user’s program operation could cause operation error to be displayed in error flag(_ERR,_LER) and continue operation. User’s can stop operation referring to error flag. This time, error task program will not be started. If error occurred when attached I/O module not controlled normally, it continues operation by controlling error task program and fault mask flag by parameter.

(4) Error Detected by User’s Program When errors detected in external control equipment(Heavy error detection error of external equipment), it continues operation by controlling error task program and fault mask flag by parameter.

9.4.4 Detailed Error Task

9.4.4.1 Error Task Operation

If errors detected by CPU during program running, ‘_ERR_SYS’ task will be raised. This time if the program prepared with ‘_ERR_SYS’ task as operating condition, it continues programming(See 7.2 How to run program).

9.4.4.2 Error Remedy in CPU

(1) After a completion of scan program, perform system trouble check in END and displays at desired error flag if errors occurred. (2) If the program registered with error task as operating condition, continue programming. (3) If there is any error in error flag, system stops. But if the error set to corresponding fault mask flag in user’s program performed in (2), system continues operation(If setting fault mask flag, it is safe to set skip flag together.)

9.4.4.3 Error Task Operation Flag

(1) I/O Module Error: _IO_DEER, _FUSE_ER, _IO_RWER, _SP_IFER, RIQ_ER (2) External Equipment Error: _ANNUN_ER For detailed error, see ’11.2 System Error Flag’. Remarks

• Displayed error flag will not be deleted automatically during operation even if an error removed(Power OFF→ON), • Error flag will not be deleted with Fault Mask Flag set. • With error flag set, ‘_ERR_SYS’ task will be occurred in END of every scan to do programming.

Page 126: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9-10

9.4.5 Example of Error Task

9.4.5.1 System Configuration and Operation Setting (1) System Configuration and Operation Setting Digital Module installed at Slot 4 and 5 of No. 1 Extended Base is constructed so that overall system operation might not be stopped when a failure of module occurred for driving operation indicator. If fault mask set, module error flag will be displayed normally. Error task will be performed every scan if an error found. (2) Error Task Program Ex. Among the above program, 16#30 will be indicated as ‘0011 0000’, mask slot in base(See ‘_SLOT_M’ of Fault Mask Flag).

// - - - Fault Mask in Slot No. 4 and 5 of BaseNo. 1

OR EN ENQ IN1 OUT

IN2

_SLOT_M[1]

16#30

_SLOT_M[1]

Comment

Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Page 127: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-1

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.1 Principle

10.1.1 Triplexing of Digital Input

10.1.1.1 Check of Digital Input

Read data of the same switch as three input contacts and if data matched with more than two, choose the value as normal data. Three inputs can be read one another instantaneously by the factors of switch position, switch state, wiring, filter delay of input module, and etc., but if no error in input, normal data will be choose after some delay.

CPU determines it to be fault and remove from operation if any input value not changed until the other two changed input data again.

10.1.1.2 Circuit Diagram of Redundant Input

Three inputs are located at Redundant Base A and B and Switched Base respectively. When installing triplex input, multi power and sensor can be applied to increase availability of system. [Fig. 10.1]Triplex Input Circuit

Choose data with more than 2 out of 3 inputs having the same value(Ex %lx2.0.0-A,%12.0.0-B%l1.0.0 in a pair).

sensor

Sensor power

Redundant Base A

Redundant Base B

Switched Base

Page 128: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-2

10.1.2 Redundancy of Digital Output

10.1.2.1 Check of Digital Output

For output module, wrong output can be occurred due to a failure of output module and element. Error consists of Permanent 0 Output and 1 Output. This time, CPU can verify the fault and cut off the output if faulty. Users shall set feedback input and measuring delay time to find where a fault occurred(set in the unit of 16-point).

10.1.2.2 Circuit Diagram of Redundant Output

When installing redundant output, ‘Single Redundant Output’, ‘Detection of only Fault Contact’, and ‘A/B Discrimination and Load Power Off’ can be applied to increase fault detection and safety of system.

Redundant Base A

Redundant Base B

Switched Base

Load Power (+) (-)

Load

* %QX2.4.0 ~ %QX2.4.15 : Redundant Output %QX2.5.0 ~ %QX2.5.15 : Output Feedback %QX2.2.0 ~ %QX2.2.1 : Load Power Off Output %QX1.2.0 ~ %QX1.2.1 : Load Power Monitoring

When a failure of switched base occurred, it can be recognized that there are errors in bothMaster Control Contacts of Redundant Base A and B. If possible, install each in separately atRedundant Base.

[Fig. 10.2] Redundant Output Circuit Diagram

Load Power(+) (-)

Load

Input Module

Output Module

Page 129: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-3

10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module

10.1.3.1 Analogue Input

Analogue Input Module detects the error of input data by user’s program(FB). Redundant FB outputs each module state and data as a result of operation. Users check module and select data. If short of sensor detected in Module(Temperature Sensor Module), error will be detected in FB when sensor disconnected.

[Fig. 10.3] Analogue Input Redundant Circuit Diagram

When signal received from one source as shown in the figure, only voltage input is enabled. If using Current Input and TC, RTD sensor, install two sensors in separately.

10.1.3.2 Analogue Output

Installed at redundant I/O and outputs the same value. It realizes output redundant by outside connection and detects output error using analogue input module by user’s program.

[Fig. 10.4] Analogue Output Redundant Circuit Diagram

Analogue Sensor

Sensor

Redundant Base A

Redundant Base B

Analogue Load Redundant Base A

Redundant Base B

Page 130: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-4

10.1.4 Parameter Setting (See 12.4 Redundant Parameter.)

10.2 I/O Processing Procedures and Method

10.2.1 I/O Processing Procedures Redundant system has the same operation procedures with that of single system. Processing time of I/O is the same with that of single system and added with Error Elimination by multi I/O during process. The following figure shows flow chart of basic control program.

[Fig.10.5] Flow Chart of Control Program

10.2.1.1 Considerations in I/O Definition

• Signal holding time of the signal entered in PLC has scan time longer than that of PLC. If input changed rapidly, input signal may not be detected and in case of multi input, it can be detected as contact Trouble.

• Take precautions when setting feedback time in feedback setting output.

• The scan time of redundant operation will be longer than that of single operation. While entering

redundant operation of standby CPU, scan time of master CPU will be longer temporarily. Take considerations of it when defining I/O(See 8.5 Scan Time).

START

Input Image Area Refresh

Scan Program Start

Scan Program End

Output Image Area Refresh

END

1 Scan

.

.

.

Input Module Contact

Output Module contact

Perform TaskProgram

Page 131: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-5

10.2.2 Detailed Input Data Processing This describes ‘input image area refresh’ for processing input data as shown in Fig. 10.5 Flow Chart of Control Program. It describes how to extract data from three input values, how to treat wrong input, and how to find fault.

10.2.2.1 Input Refresh Flow Chart

[Fig. 10.6] Input Refresh Flow Chart

(1) Input Data Read Master reads input of Redundant Base and Switched Base that it belonged to and Standby does only input of Redundant Base.

(2) Data Change

Master receives the input of redundant base read by standby and standby does inputs of Redundant and Switched Bases read by master. (If there is single base in A side, transfer single base input into B side). Two CPU modules share the same input data.

(3) Wrong Input Processing

If changed into normal out of those indicated as wrong input in previous scan input check, it will be released and if not changed and exceeded permissible trouble detection time, it will be treated as fault.

(4) Right Input Value Determination

Determines Right input value by majority rules suing three input data).

(5) Wrong Input Detection Compare three input data read from, indicate new wrong input, and monitor it in subsequent scan. If faulty contacts remained, choose Right input value at two contacts and if both two being 1, choose 1. Wrong input detection will not be done in remaining two contacts.

Input Data Scan Start

CPU A.B reads data from inputmodule.

Exchange read data.

Release the indication of ‘WrongInput’ in previous input or treat asfault.

Determine right input value fromthree input data according tomajority rule.

Additionally update ‘Wrong Input’indication according to new data.

Scan Program Entry

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Page 132: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-6

10.2.3 Ex. Of Input Data Processing

10.2.3.1 Ex. Of Normal Input Processing

The following provides timing diagram related to extraction of Right input value used in program operation when actual input signal received normally.

[Fig. 10.7] Right Input Value Detection

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0)

B) Right Input Value Detection according to input filter when signal delay occurred

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0)

C) Right Input Value Detection When On/Off delay of input signal occurred in other signal O: Wrong Input detection X: Wrong Input Release

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0)

A) Detection Diagram of Right Input Value from Normal Input Signal

Page 133: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-7

• Operation Description of Fig. A)

If three input signals input normally without delay and input data refresh run at dashed point every input, data of input image area %2X2.0.0 will have the same Right input value as shown in the figure.

• Operation Description of Fig. B) Timing diagram of B) shows that three signals input with time delay due to filter delay and etc. In the first scan, three input values become 0 and Right input value be 0. In scan 2, two inputs(%IX2.0.0(A), %IX2.0.0(B)) will be 1, Right input value changed to 1 and remaining input 0(%IX1.0.0)be indicated as ‘Wrong Input’. In Scan 3, three inputs will be 1, right input values be kept at 1, and ‘Wrong Input’ indication released as changed to right input value, e.g. 1. In Scan 4 and 5, there is no change in signal and right input value has been changed to 0 in Scan 6, when input (%IX1.0.0) remained as 1, it will be indicated ‘wrong input’. In Scan 7, as the input indicated as ‘wrong input’ changed as right input value, e.g. 0, ‘wrong input indication’ will be released.

10.2.3.2 Ex. Of Fault Input Processing

The following shows timing diagram related to extract of right input and detection of error used in program operation when a partial fault of input occurred. Wrong input is detected in input refresh and released every 20ms. Perform troubleshooting to determine if error detection setting time exceeded or not at scan END every 20ms. The contacts detected as a fault will be displayed with _RIQ_A_ERR[n], _RIQ_B_ERR[n], _RIQ_C_ERR[n] and verified in ‘I/O Error Detailed Information’ menu of GMWIN.

20ms

Fault DetectionF

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0) A) Permanent Fault 0 of input signal

20ms

Fault Detection

F

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B) %IX1.0.0

정입력값

(%IX2.0.0)

B) Permanent Fault 1 of input i l

20ms

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0)

Page 134: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-8

[Fig. 10.8] Detection Diagram of Fault Input

(1) Permanent 0 Fault of Input Signal

Timing Diagram A) shows when one(%IX1.0.0) of three inputs is permanent fault 0 and the others operate normally.

In Scan 2, the input rather than right input(%IX2.0.2(A)) is indicated as ‘Wrong Input’, but released from wrong input because two inputs being 1 after 20ms.

In Scan 3, two inputs set at 1, so right input value changed to 1 and 0 inputIX1.0.0) indicated as ‘wrong input’. This contact will be detected as a fault in scan 5 because it exceeded fault detection setting time without ‘wrong input’ released. %1X1.0.0 Fault Mark continues.

From Scan 5, exclude fault contact and determine right input value using the other two inputs. To improve safety in this process, right input value will be set to 0 if any two signals excepting faulty input being 0.

(2) Permanent 1 Fault of Input Signal Timing Diagram B) shows when one(%IX1.0.0) of three inputs is permanent fault 1 and the others operate normally.

20ms

Fault Detection

F

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

정입력값

(%IX2.0.0)

D) Permanent Fault 0 of Input Signal During Operation(1Return Disabled)

20ms

Fault Detection

F

Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

정입력값

(%IX2.0.0)

C) Permanent Fault 1 of Input Signal During Operation(0Return Disabled)

O : Wrong Input Detection X : Wrong Input Release F : Fault Input Detection N : Wrong Input Not Detected

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0)

Right Input Value

(%IX2.0.0)

Page 135: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-9

In Scan 2, right input value changed to 1 and input(%1X1.0.0) remained as 0 indicated as ‘wrong input’, but released from wrong input after 20ms. In Scan 4, input(%1X2.0.0(A)) indicated as wrong input will be released from wrong input after 20ms. In Scan 5, input(%1X1.0.0) indicated as wrong input will be detected as a fault because not being normalized within fault detection setting time.

(3) Permanent 1 Fault of Input Signal During Operation Timing Diagram C) shows when one(%IX1.0.0) of three inputs is permanent fault 1 and the others operate normally.

‘Wrong Input’ signal of scan 2 will be soon returned and input circuit of %1X1.0.0 between scan 3 and 6 can cause Permanent 1 fault due to switch contact fusion and etc., which can be detected as wrong input in scan 6 and then as a fault after fault detection setting time. ‘Fault Mark’ of 1%IX1.0.0 will be continued.

(4) Permanent 0 Fault of Input Signal During Operation Timing Diagram D) shows when one(%IX2.0.0(B)) of three inputs is permanent fault 0 and the others operate normally. Permanent Fault 0 will be occurred between scan 2 and 3, which can be detected as wrong input in scan 3 and then as a fault after fault detection setting time.

As above mentioned, wrong data will not be occurred in right input value in the middle of fault and right input value be 1 only when the remained two signals are 1 for safety from fault detection.

Page 136: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-10

10.2.4 Detailed Output Data Processing This flow chart provides detailed information for ‘output image area refresh’ as shown in Fig. 10.5. This describes comparison of operation result output data, output from 2 output points, fault detection of output, and auto shutoff of output when faults occurred.

[Fig. 10.9] Output Refresh Flow Chart

(1) Match of Output Data

During redundant operation, compare output data operated in two CPU modules and check if matched with operation result after a completion of scan. In case of different operation result, find the cause and if cause not determined, output it as master data. This time, standby CPU module should be restarted to match with inner data because of having different data in inner data and resulting in wrong results even in continuous operation.

(2) Detection of Fault Contact Each CPU module detects a fault if reading feedback input through input module and after setting time, previous output data not provided with feedback.

Remarks

• If output change time by user’s program being shorter than the sum of signal delay time between

output and input modules, it can cause wrong fault detection.

(3) Output Off

In case of faulty module and abnormal line, CPU module is not able to control abnormal output through output module, which cause a fault, so turn off main power. Then CPU module turns off the power of load by turning OFF master control output contact at parameter designated in user’s program if fault contact detected.

Output Data Processing Start

CPU A.B compare each outputdata and verify if matched with.

Read output data throughfeedback input module and checkoutput contact for disabnormal.

Turn off output power and mark thefault when fault contact found.

Output data in output module ofbase connected to each.

Save new output value in memory.

Scan Program Entry

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Page 137: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-11

(4) Data Output into Output Module

For output module without error, each CPU module outputs data into output module attached to it. Output of switched base will be output by master CPU module.

(5) Save of Output Value To detect fault through feedback input, save output data in memory.

10.2.5 Ex. Of Output Data Processing • Ex. Of Normal Output

The following figure shows timing diagram when output signal driven normally. Output signal is feedback to input and feedback time set to 50ms with Power Off Contact designated.

% Q X 2. 4 .0 ( A)

% Q X 2. 4 .0 ( B)

% I X 2. 5 .0 ( A)

% I X 2. 5 .0 ( B)

출 력 스 캔 : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

% Q X 2. 2 .0 ( A)

% Q X 2. 2 .1 ( B)

T d1

T d4

T d2

T d3

T 0

[Fig. 10.10] Feedback Data Detection of Normal Output Signal

The above timing diagram shows that two output signals output the same signal (%QX2.4.0(A), %QX2.4.0(B)) through each output module of redundant output base, feedback output signal(%IX2.5.0(A), %IX2.5.0(B)) through input module of each base, and if error detected, main power turned off by master control output (%QX2.2.0(A), %QX2.2.1(B)) operation. For module configuration and connection, see ’10.2 Digital Output Redundancy’.)

CPU module starts (T0) operation with Master Control Output(%QX2.2.0(A), %QX2.2.1(B)) set to ON after power supply and self diagnosis. Whenever one time operation completed, output operation results at output module. Output data of output module will be output to outside after delay time (Td1,Td2) of output element. Output signal can be received to CPU Module after filter delay time of feedback input module. Then, CPU module checks feedback data after constant delay time(Td3,Td4).

In the above figure, if assumed to output delay 5ms and input delay 10ms, Td3, Td4 becomes 15ms and output signal will be feedback within time delay(Td3, Td4) shorter than setting feedback time 50ms. CPU module checks if there are no errors in output and continues operation with master control output ON.

Remarks

• If feedback time set to 10ms shorter than signal delay time in the above system, CPU may monitor feedback data until 10ms and determine it as a fault.

%QX2.4.0(A)

%QX2.4.0(B)

%IX2.5.0(A)

%IX2.5.0(B)

%QX2.2.0(A)

%QX2.2.0(B)

Output Scan

Page 138: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-12

• Ex. Of Fault Output Processing

The following shows the timing diagram for faulty output detection. Output signal will be feedback to input and feedback time set to 50ms with Power Off Contact designated. Permanent 1 Fault Detection

%QX2.4.0(A)

%QX2.4.0(B)

%IX2.5.0(A)

%IX2.5.0(B)

출력 스캔: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

%QX2.2.0(A)

%QX2.2.1(B)

Td1

Td4

Td2

Td3

T0

[Fig. 10.11] Timing Diagram of Permanent 1 Fault Output Detection

The configuration and connection of each signal is as described in ‘Ex. Of Normal Output Processing’.

When faults occurred with Permanent 1 in %QX2.4.0(B) output, %QX2.4.0(A) is feedback with 0 after Td4, but %QX2.4.0(B) not returned to 0 and determined as a fault by feedback input (%IX2.5.0(B)) check of CPU module after 50ms of setting time. Then, master control output (%QX2.2.1(B)) controlling main load power of applicable output will be shutoff automatically and displayed in Fault Flag.

This time load is driven normally with A side output and system continues operation. When Permanent 1 Fault occurred, time setting can cause wrong output as feedback setting time.

Permanent 0 Fault Detection

%QX2.4.0(A)

%QX2.4.0(B)

%IX2.5.0(A)

%IX2.5.0(B)

출력 스캔: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

%QX2.2.0(A)

%QX2.2.1(B)

Td1

Td4

Td2

Td3

T0

[Fig. 10.12] Timing Diagram of Permanent 0 Fault Output Detection

The configuration and connection of each signal is as described in ‘Ex. Of Normal Output Processing’.

50ms

50ms

%QX2.4.0(A)

%QX2.4.0(B)

%IX2.5.0(A)

%IX2.5.0(B)

%QX2.2.0(A)

%QX2.2.0(B)

%QX2.4.0(A)

%QX2.4.0(B)

%IX2.5.0(A)

%IX2.5.0(B)

%QX2.2.0(A)

%QX2.2.0(B)

Output scan

Output scan

Page 139: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10-13

When faults occurred with Permanent 0 in %QX2.4.0(B) output, %QX2.4.0(A) is feedback with 1 after Td3, but %QX2.4.0(B) not returned to 1 and determined as a fault by feedback input (%IX2.5.0(B)) check of CPU module after 50ms of setting time. Then, master control output (%QX2.2.1(B)) controlling main load power of applicable output will be shutoff automatically and displayed in Fault Flag.

This time load is driven normally with A side output and system continues operation. When Permanent 0 Fault occurred, wrong output will not be occurred.

Page 140: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-1

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.1 User Flag

Key Word Type Write

Enable Content Description

_LER BOOL Enable Operation Error Latch Flag

As operation error latch flag in the unit of program block(PB), error occurred during programming will be kept until the end of program block. Can be deleted by program.

_ERR BOOL Enable Operation Error Flag

As operation error flag in the unit of operation function(FN) or function block(FB), updated whenever operation run.

_T20MS * BOOL 20ms Clock

_T100MS * BOOL 100ms Clock

_T200MS * BOOL 200ms Clock

_T1S * BOOL 1 sec. Clock

_T2S * BOOL 2 sec. Clock

_T10S * BOOL 10 sec. Clock

_T20S * BOOL 20 sec. Clock

_T60S * BOOL 60 sec. Clock

Available in user program and toggled ON/OFF in half period. As proceeding signal toggle after a completion of scan, clock signal can be delayed or distorted according to programming time. Use clock sufficient longer than scan time.

Clock signal starts at OFF when initialization program and scan program started.

_T100MS Ex. Of Clock 50ms 50ms

_ON * BOOL Firm ON Firm ON flag available in user programming

_OFF * BOOL Firm OFF Firm OFF flag available in user programming

_1ON * BOOL First Scan ON ON only during first scan after operation started.

_1OFF * BOOL First Scan OFF OFF only during first scan after operation started

_STOG * BOOL Scan toggle ON/OFF toggle flag in every scan when programming user program.

_INIT_DONE BOOL Enable Initial Program Completed

If set this flag in initialization program prepared by users, stop running initialization programming and start scan program. (See 11.6 ‘_INIT_RUN’ of system operation status information flag)

_RTC_DATE DATE Current Data of RTC

Standard Date Data on the basis of Jan. 1, 1984

_RTC_TOD TOD Current Time of RTC

Time data a day on the basis of 00:00:00 , unit of msec

_RTC_WEEK UINT Current Date of RTC

Data representing day of week(0:Mon, 1:Tues, 2:Wed, 3:Thurs, 4:Fri, 5:Sat, 6:Sun)

Remarks

* Initialized when running initialization programming and after a completion of initialization programming 1) Initialized(Cold, Warm) when starting scan programming 2) Returned(Hot) to the previous state before stop when starting scan programming * To match with operation data in redundant, copy the value of master into standby at scan END in case of

‘_T20MS ~ _STOG’, ‘_RTC_DATE ~ _RTC_WEEK’.

Page 141: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-2

11.2 System Error Flag

Redundant System Error Flag

Key Word Type BIT

position Content Description

_CNF_ER WORD Represe-

ntative Key word

System error(Heavy Fault)

Related to operation stop of redundant system.

_CPU_ER BOOL BIT 0 CPU Configuration error

Errors occurred in CPU A or CPU B during redundant operation are displayed in error representative flag(_CPU_A__ER, _CPU_B_ER) and CPU error occurred stops operation. Errors occurred while operating in single master are displayed simultaneously in CPU flag and this flag. (For details, see _SYS_ERR and S 002 ~ S116 of Chat. 13)

_IO_TYER BOOL BIT 1 Module type mismatch error

Errors occurred in CPU A or CPU B during redundant operation are displayed in error representative flag and CPU error occurred stops operation. Errors occurred while operating in single master are displayed simultaneously in CPU flag and this flag. (See _IO_A_TYER, _IO_B_TYER)

_IO_DEER BOOL BIT 2 Module Mount/Dismount Error

Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found configuration error in I/O module at the same address. (See _IO_A_DEER, _IO_B_DEER)

_FUSE_ER BOOL BIT 3 FUSE Disconnection Error

Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found errors of fuse in I/O module at the same address. (See _FUSE_A_ER, _FUSE_B_ER)

_IO_RWER BOOL BIT 4 I/O module Read/Write Error(Failure)

Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found errors of Read/Write in I/O module at the same address. (See _IO_A_RWER, _IO_B_RWER)

_SP_IFER BOOL BIT 5

Special/Communication Module Interface Error(Failure)

Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found errors of Special/Communication Module at the same address. (See _SP_A_IFER, _SP_B_IFER)

_ANNUN_ER BOOL BIT 6

Heavy Fault Detection Error of External Equipment

Displayed if detecting heavy fault of external equipment by user program and writing in _ANC_ERR[n].

BIT 7 Standby Entry Error

Displayed if failed to participate in redundant operation and only in CPU tried to entry standby. Occurred when failed in operation synchronization between CPU.

_WD_ER BOOL BIT 8 Scan Watchdog Error

_CODE_ER BOOL BIT 9 Program Code Error

_STACK_ER BOOL BIT 10 Stack Over Error

_P_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 11 Program Error

Errors occurred in CPU A or CPU B during redundant operation are displayed in error representative flag and CPU error occurred stops operation. Errors occurred while operating in single master are displayed simultaneously in CPU flag and this flag. (See _CNF_A_ER, _CNF_B_ER )

_RIQ_ER BOOL BIT 14 I/O contact ErrorDisplayed when normal I/O disabled due to a failure of all contacts of multi I/O in redundant system

(See RIQ_ERR[n] )

Page 142: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-3

A CPU System Error Flag

Key Word Type BIT

position Content Description

_CNF_A_ER WORD Repre-

sentative key word

A CPU System error

Error occurred in A CPU system.

_CPU_A_ER BOOL BIT 0 A CPU Configuration Error

Occurred when normal operation disabled in CPU module due to errors of CPU mounting position of base, redundant composition and etc. (For details, see _SYS_ERR and S 002~S 116 of Chap. 13)

_IO_A_TYER BOOL BIT 1 A CPU System Module Type Mismatch Error

Displayed if the configuration different between I/O configuration parameter and actual module mounted at A CPU system or if specific module mounted at disavailable slot in starting. (See _IO_A_TYER_N, _IO_A_TYERR[n] )

_IO_A_DEER BOOL BIT 2

A CPU System Module Mount/Dismount Error

Displayed if module configuration changed in base, controlled by A CPU system. (See _IO_A_DEER_N, _IO_A_DEERR[n] )

_FUSE_A_ER BOOL BIT 3

A CPU System FUSE Disconnection Error

Displayed if fuse of output module disconnected in base, controlled by A CPU system, during operation. (See _FUSE_A_ER_N, _FUSE_A_ERR[n])

_IO_A_RWER BOOL BIT 4 A CPU System Read/Write Error(Failure)

Displayed if write/read errors of I/O module occurred in base, controlled by A CPU system, during operation. (See _I O_A__RWER_N, _IO_A_RWERR[n])

_SP_A_IFER BOOL BIT 5

A CPU System Special/Communication Module Interface Error(Failure)

Displayed if normal interface disabled due to initialization failure or misoperation of special or communication module in base, controlled by A CPU system. (See _SP_A_IFER_N, _SP_A_IFERR[n])

BIT 7 A CPU Standby Entry Error

Displayed if A CPU failed to participate in redundant operation while operating B CPU.

_WD_A_ER BOOL BIT 8 A CPU Scan Watchdog Error

Displayed if program scan time of A CPU exceeded SCAN WATCH DOG TIME designated by parameter.

_CODE_A_ER BOOL BIT 9 A CPU Program Error

Displayed when A CPU encountered indecipherable command while running user programming.

_STACK_A_

ER BOOL BIT 10

A CPU Stack Over Error

Displayed when A CPU exceeded normal range of program stack during programming.

_P_A_BCK_

ER BOOL BIT 11

A CPU Program Error

Displayed if A CPU program memory broken or programming disabled due to program error. (See _DOMAIN_A_ST)

Page 143: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-4

B CPU System Error Flag

Key Word Type BIT

position Content Description

_CNF_B_ER WORD Represe-

ntative key word

B CPU System error

Error occurred in B CPU system.

_CPU_B_ER BOOL BIT 0 B CPU Configuration Error

Occurred when normal operation disabled in CPU module due to B CPU self diagnostic error, errors of CPU mounting position of base, redundant composition and etc. (For details, see _SYS_ERR and S 002~S 116 of Chap. 13)

_IO_B_TYER BOOL BIT 1 B CPU System Module Type Mismatch Error

Displayed if the configuration different between I/O configuration parameter and actual module mounted at B CPU system or if specific module mounted at disavailable slot in starting. (See _IO_B_TYER_N, _IO_B_TYERR[n] )

_IO_B_DEER BOOL BIT 2

B CPU System Module Mount/Dismount Error

Displayed if module configuration changed in base, controlled by A CPU system. (See _IO_B_DEER_N, _IO_B_DEERR[n] )

_FUSE_B_ER BOOL BIT 3

B CPU System FUSE Disconnection Error

Displayed if fuse of output module disconnected in base, controlled by A BPU system, during operation. (See _FUSE_B_ER_N, _FUSE_B_ERR[n])

_IO_B_RWER BOOL BIT 4 B CPU System Read/Write Error(Failure)

Displayed if write/read errors of I/O module occurred in base, controlled by B CPU system, during operation. (See _I O_B__RWER_N, _IO_B_RWERR[n])

_SP_B_IFER BOOL BIT 5

B CPU System Special/Communication Module Interface Error(Failure)

Displayed if normal interface disabled due to initialization failure or misoperation of special or communication module in base, controlled by B CPU system. (See _SP_B_IFER_N, _SP_B_IFERR[n])

BIT 7 B CPU Standby Entry Error

Displayed if B CPU failed to participate in redundant operation while operating A CPU.

_WD_B_ER BOOL BIT 8 B CPU Scan Watchdog Error

Displayed if program scan time of B CPU exceeded SCAN WATCH DOG TIME designated by parameter.

_CODE_B_ER BOOL BIT 9 B CPU Program Error

Displayed when B CPU encountered indecipherable command while running user programming.

_STACK_B_

ER BOOL BIT 10

A CPU Stack Over Error

Displayed when B CPU exceeded normal range of program stack during programming.

_P_B_BCK_

ER BOOL BIT 11

B CPU System error

Displayed if B CPU program memory broken or programming disabled due to program error. (See _DOMAIN_B_ST)

Page 144: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-5

11.3 System Fault Mask Flag

Fault Mask Flag(Write Enabled)

Key Word Type BIT

position Content Description

_CNF_ER_M BYTE Represe-

ntative key word

Continue operation in system error(heavy fault)

Continue operation when errors occurred

_ANNUN_ER_M

BOOL BIT 6 Continue operation when user error detected

Detection of heavy fault from external equipment, e.g. when overriding and continuing to operation when _ANNUN_ER occurred.

_RIQ_ER_M BOOL BIT 14 Continue operation when I/O contacts detected

If all multi I/O contacts(A, B toggle) failed during redundant operation, to override and continue operation.

Module Fault Mask Flag(Write Enabled

Key word Type Range Content Description

_BASE_M[n] BOOL ARRAY

n:0~15 Setting in the unit of base

Use if overriding and continuing operation when errors occurred in the base or module attached to during operation.

Set the position of base to be masked.

_SLOT_M[n] BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15 Setting in the unit of slot

Use if overriding and continuing operation when errors occurred in the mounted module during operation.

Set the position of slot to be masked.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0_BASE_M[n]

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_SLOT_M[0] 베이스 0

_SLOT_M[1] 베이스 1

_SLOT_M[15] 베이스 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Page 145: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-6

Module Skip Flag(Write Enabled)

Key word Type Range Content Description

_BASE_A_

S[n] BOOL ARRAY

n:0~15 A CPU Base Skip

Used to exclude specific extension base from A CPU operation. If setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when replacing extension base, power and module during operation.

_SLOT_A_S

[n] BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15 A CPU Slot Skip

Used to exclude specific extension base from A CPU operation. If setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when replacing module of extension base during operation.

_BASE_B_

S[n] BOOL ARRAY

n:0~15 B CPU Base Skip

Used to exclude specific extension base from B CPU operation. If setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when replacing extension base, power and module during operation.

_SLOT_B_S

[n] BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15 B CPU Slot Skip

Used to exclude specific extension base from B CPU operation. If setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when replacing module of extension base during operation.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0_BASE_A_S[n]

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_SLOT_A_S[0] 베이스 0

_SLOT_A_S[1] 베이스 1

_SLOT_A_S[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0_BASE_B_S[n]

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_SLOT_B_S[0] 베이스 0

_SLOT_B_S[1] 베이스 1

_SLOT_B_S[15] 베이스 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Page 146: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-7

11.4 System Warning Flag

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

_CNF_WAR WORD Repres-entative key word

System Warning Batch processing of the following warning flags.

_RTC_ERR BOOL BIT 0 RTC Data Error Displayed when RTC data error occurred.

_D_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 1 Data Back up Error

Used in initialization program to indicate if operation data lost in data memory due to back up error, normal hot or warm restart disabled, and cold restart performed. [Reset automatically after a completion of initialization program.]

_H_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 2 Hot Restart Disable Arror

Used in initialization program to indicate if warm or cold restart performed as parameter because hot restart time exceeded to recover power during programming and impossible to back up operation data necessary in hot restart. [Reset automatically after a completion of initialization program.]

_AB_SD_ER BOOL BIT 3 ABNORMAL SHUTDOWN

Displayed if cold restart performed because operation unable to be recovered in power on after program stopped due to power off during operation. Used in initialization program to alert continuous operation not performed to retain data. [Reset automatically after a completion of initialization program.]

Also displayed If program stopped by 'ESTOP' function.

_TASK_ERR BOOL BIT 4

Task Collision(Positive period, outside task)

Indicates task collision if redundant operation required when running user program. (For details, see _TC_BMAP[n], _TC_CNT[n])

_BAT_ERR BOOL BIT 5 Battery Error Displayed when battery voltage for user program and data memory back up below the specified.

_ANNUN_WR BOOL BIT 6

Light Fault Detected of External Equipment

If light fault detected from external equipment by user program and recorded in _ANC_WB[n].

_E_PWR_ER BOOL BIT 7 Base Power ErrorDisplayed when power supply not normalized in extension base of A CPU or B CPU when power on. (See _CNF_AB_WAR)

_HSPMT1_ER BOOL BIT 8 Highway Link Parameter 1 Error

_HSPMT2_ER BOOL BIT 9 Highway Link Parameter 2 Error

_HSPMT3_ER BOOL BIT 10 Highway Link Parameter 3 Error

_HSPMT4_ER BOOL BIT 11 Highway Link Parameter 4 Error

Displayed when checking parameter error of each highway link and notifying its operation disabled.

Reset in highway link disabled(stop)

_FDNET_WR BOOL BIT 12 Network, Cable redundant Error

Displayed when network or cable redundant composed wrong or disconnected in redundant network configuration.

Page 147: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-8

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

_RIQ_WR BOOL BIT 14 Contact Failure Indicates partial fault when errors occurred in any I/O contacts(A, B, C) of redundant system but operated through normal contacts.

_E_RPWR_WR BOOL BIT 15 Redundant Power Error of Extension Base

Displayed when errors occurred in one of two powers if applying power redundant base to extension base.

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

_CNF_AB_WAR WORD Representative

Key word System Warning Detailed warning flag of CPU A, CPU B

_RTC_A_ERR BOOL BIT 0 A CPU of RTC error

Indicates RTC data error of A CPU.

_RTC_B_ERR BOOL BIT 1 B CPU of RTC error

Indicates RTC data error of B CPU.

_D_A_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 2 A CPU of data BACK_UP error

Used in initialization program to indicate if operation data lost in data memory due to back up error of A CPU, normal hot or warm restart disabled, and cold restart performed.

Reset automatically after a completion of initialization program.

_D_B_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 3 B CPU of data

BACK_UP error

Used in initialization program to indicate if operation data lost in data memory due to back up error of B CPU, normal hot or warm restart disabled, and cold restart performed.

Reset automatically after a completion of initialization program.

_BAT_A_ERR BOOL BIT 4 A CPU of battery error

Displayed when battery voltage below the specified for A CPU user program and data memory back up.

_BAT_B_ERR BOOL BIT 5 B CPU of battery error

Displayed when battery voltage below the specified for B CPU user program and data memory back up.

_E_A_PWR_ER BOOL BIT 6 A CPU of extension base of power error

Displayed if power of extension base not normalized yet when power on of A CPU. CPU waits for power normalization in standby.

_E_B_PWR_ER BOOL BIT 7

B CPU of extension

Base of power error

Displayed if power of extension base not normalized yet when power on of B CPU. CPU waits for power normalization in standby.

Page 148: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-9

11.5 System Error and Warning Details Flag

Key word Type Range Content Description

_IO_A_TYER_N

UINT 0~127

Module Type Mismatch Slot Number of A CPU system

If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration parameter in A CPU system or specific module mounted to disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record the lowest slot number.

_IO_A_TYERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

Module Type Mismatch Position of A CPU system

If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration parameter in A CPU system or specific module mounted to disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_IO_B_TYER_N

UINT 0~127

Module Type Mismatch Slot Number of B CPU system

If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration parameter in B CPU system or specific module mounted to disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record the lowest slot number.

_IO_B_TYERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

Module Type Mismatch Position of B CPU system

If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration parameter in B CPU system or specific module mounted to disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_IO_A_DEER_N

UINT 0~127

Module Mount/Dismount Slot Number of A CPU System

While operating, if module configuration changed in the base controlled by A CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error occurred. Detect slot error and record the lowest slot number.

_IO_A_DEERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

Module Mount/Dismount Position of A CPU System

While operating, if module configuration changed in the base controlled by A CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error occurred. Detect slot error and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_IO_B_DEER_N

UINT 0~127

Module Mount/Dismount Slot Number of B CPU System

While operating, if module configuration changed in the base controlled by B CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error occurred. Detect slot error and record the lowest slot number.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_A_TYERR[0] 베이스 0

_IO_A_TYERR[1] 베이스 1

_IO_A_TYERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_A_DEERR[0] 베이스 0

_IO_A_DEERR[1] 베이스 1

_IO_A_DEERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_B_TYERR[0] 베이스 0

_IO_B_TYERR[1] 베이스 1

_IO_B_TYERR[15] 베이스 15

Base

Base 0 Base 1 Base 15

Base 0 Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Page 149: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-10

Key word Type Range Content Description

_IO_B_DEERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

Module Mount/Dismount Position of B CPU System

While operating, if module configuration changed in the base controlled by B CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error occurred. Detect slot error and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_FUSE_A_ER_N

UINT 0~127

FUSE disconnection slot number of A CPU system

While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the base controlled by A CPU system. Detect if fuse disconnected and record the lowest slot number.

_FUSE_A_ERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

FUSE disconnection slot position of A CPU system

While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the base controlled by A CPU system. Detect if fuse disconnected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_FUSE_B_ER_N

UINT 0~127

FUSE disconnection slot number of B CPU system

While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record the lowest slot number.

_FUSE_B_ERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

FUSE disconnection slot position of B CPU system

While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_IO_A_RWER_N

UINT 0~127

I/O Module Read/Write Error Slot Number of A CPU System

While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the base controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record the lowest slot number.

_IO_A_RWERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

I/O Module Read/Write Error Slot Position of A CPU System

While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the base controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_B_DEERR[0] 베이스 0

_IO_B_DEERR[1] 베이스 1

_IO_B_DEERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_FUSE_A_ERR[0] 베이스 0

_FUSE_A_ERR[1] 베이스 1

_FUSE_A_ERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_FUSE_B_ERR[0] 베이스 0

_FUSE_B_ERR[1] 베이스 1

_FUSE_B_ERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_A_RWERR[0] 베이스 0

_IO_A_RWERR[1] 베이스 1

_IO_A_RWERR[15] 베이스 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Page 150: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-11

Key word Type Range Content Description

_IO_B_RWER_N

UINT 0~127

I/O Module Read/Write Error Slot Number of B CPU System

While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record the lowest slot number.

_IO_B_RWERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n:0~15

I/O Module Read/Write Error Slot Position of B CPU System

While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_SP_A_IFER_N

UINT 0~127

Special/Communication Module Interface Error Slot Number of A CPU System

When an error occurred if special or communication module failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record the lowest slot number.

_SP_A_IFERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n: 0~15

Special/Communication Module Interface Error Slot Position of A CPU System

When an error occurred if special or communication module failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_SP_B_IFER_N

UINT 0~127

Special/Communication Module Interface Error Slot Number of B CPU System

When an error occurred if special or communication module failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record the lowest slot number

_SP_B_IFERR[n]

BYTE ARRAY

n: 0~15

Special/Communication Module Interface Error Slot Position of B CPU System

When an error occurred if special or communication module failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.

_ANC_ERR

[n] ∗1 UINT

n: 0~15

Fault Detection from External Equipment

Where detected and recorded heavy fault from external equipment by user program and the number to be identified with error type recorded at each 16-point( 0 disavailable).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_SP_A_IFERR[0] 베이스 0

_SP_A_IFERR[1] 베이스 1

_SP_A_IFERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_B_RWERR[0] 베이스 0

_IO_B_RWERR[1] 베이스 1

_IO_B_RWERR[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_SP_B_IFERR[0] 베이스 0

_SP_B_IFERR[1] 베이스 1

_SP_B_IFERR[15] 베이스 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Base 0Base 1 Base 15

Page 151: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-12

Key word Type Range Content Description

_ANC_WAR

[n] ∗1 UINT n: 0~7

Fault Detection from External Equipment

If warning displayed in _ANC_WB[n] by user program, BIT position indicated in digit sequentially from _ANC_WAR[0] (n=0, the latest data)

_ANC_WB[n]

∗1 BOOL ARRAY

n:0~511

Fault Detection BIT map from External Equipment

Detect light fault from external equipment by user program and record at Bit-MAP. (0 disavailable)

_TC_BMAP

[n] ∗1 BOOL ARRAY

n:0~47

TASK COLLISION Bit_Map

Positive:

n:0~31

Outside:

n:32~47

Detected and displayed with bitmap when the same task running by each task or ‘task collision’ occurred in standby state.

_TC_CNT[n]

∗1 UINT n:0~47

TASK COLLISION COUNTER

While running user program, detect when task collision occurred by each task and record task collision number(n; task number)

_BAT_A_ER_TM

DATE& TIME

Battery Voltage Drop Time of A CPU

Record the time first detected battery voltage drop of A CPU.

Reset if battery voltage returned to normal.

_BAT_B_ER_TM

DATE& TIME

Battery Voltage Drop Time of B CPU

Record the time first detected battery voltage drop of B CPU.

Reset if battery voltage returned to normal.

_AC_F_CNT∗1

UINT 0~

65535 AC FAIL Count

Count the occurred number of instantaneous power failure in Run mode. That is, count all of instantaneous power failures in A CPU, B CPU, and Extension Base.

_AC_F_TM[n]

DATE& TIME ARRAY

n:0~15 Instantaneous Power Failure History

Retained with the time instantaneous power failure occurred on the basis of the latest up to 16 in Run Mode. (n=0; the latest data).

_ERR_HIS[n]

*2 BLOCK ARRAY

n:0~15 Error History

Time error occurred, up to 16 on the basis of the latest. (n=0; the latest data).

Stop Time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)

Error Code : UINT (2 BYTE)

_MODE_A_HIS

[n]

*2

BLOCK ARRAY

n:0~15

Operation Mode Change History of A CPU

Record operation mode changed time, operation mode, and restart mode of A CPU system up to 16 on the basis of the latest((n=0; the latest data).

Changed time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)

Operation Mode : UINT (2 BYTE)

Restart : UINT (2 BYTE)

_ANC_WB[n]: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

511 510 509 508 507 506 505 504

_TC_BMAP[n]: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40

Page 152: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-13

Key word Type Range Content Description

_MODE_B_HIS[n] *2

BLOCK ARRAY

n:0~15

Operation Mode Change History of B CPU

Record operation mode changed time, operation mode, and restart mode of B CPU system up to 16 on the basis of the latest((n=0; the latest data).

Changed time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)

Operation Mode : UINT (2 BYTE)

Restart : UINT (2 BYTE)

_RED_HIS[n]

*2 BLOCK ARRAY

n:0~15

Operation Mode Change History of Redundant System

Record operation mode changed time, operation mode, and restart mode of Redundant system up to 16 on the basis of the latest((n=0; the latest data).

Changed Time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)

Operation Mode : UINT (2 BYTE)

Restart : UINT (2 BYTE)

_RIQ_ERR[n]

Long

WORD

ARRAY

n:0~

127 Fault Contact Error Details

Indicate contact position of fault disabled in normal I/O due to a failure of all multi I/O contacts in redundant system. N; module serial number, a LWORD includes 64-point contact.

(Ex.: No. 1 Base, Module of No. 0 Module n=8x1+0=8)

_RIQ_A_ERR[n] *1

Long

WORD ARRAY

n:0~

127

Fault Contact Warning Details

(A Side)

Indicates the position of faulty contact from multi I/O contacts in A side.

_RIQ_B_ERR[n] *1

Long

WORD ARRAY

n:0~

127

Fault Contact Warning Details

(B Side)

Indicates the position of faulty contact from multi I/O contacts in B side.

_RIQ_C_ERR[n] *1

Long

WORD ARRAY

n:0~

127

Fault Contact Warning Details (Switch Side)

Indicates the position of faulty contact from multi I/O contacts in switched base.

*1 Flag monitoring or program write enable flag *2 does not provide users with flag directly. Check the content in applicable menu of GMWIN.

Page 153: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-14

11.6 System Operation Status Information Flag

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

_CPU_TYPE UINT 0~255 System Type CPU Type Identification No. – GMR-CPUA:16(0), GMR-CPUB:15

Reference: GM1-CPUA:0, GM2-CPUA:1, GM3-CPUA:2

_VER_A_NUM UINT O/S Version No. of A CPU

O/S version number of A CPU module

_VER_B_NUM UINT O/S Version No. of B CPU

O/S version number of B CPU module

_MEM_A_TYPE UINT 1~5 Memory Module Type of A CPU

Type of program memory module mounted at A CPU

(0:Not mounted, Type:1~5)

_MEM_B_TYPE UINT 1~5 Memory Module Type of B CPU

Type of program memory module mounted at B CPU

(0:Not mounted, Type:1~5)

- Mode and Operation of A CPU

Status Information of mode and operation of A CPU system.

BIT 0 Local Control Operation Mode can be changed only by mode key or by GMWIN.

BIT 1 STOP

BIT 2 RUN

BIT 3 PAUSE(None)

BIT 4 DEBUG

Indicates the operation of CPU.

BIT 5 Operation Mode Change by Key

BIT 6 Change by Local GMWIN에

BIT 7 Change by Remote GMWIN에

BIT 8 Operation Mode Change by Communication

Factor changed into current operation mode.

BIT 9 STOP by STOP function

Stopped after a completion of scan by STOP function in RUN mode.

BIT 10 Forced Input Running forced On/Off for input contact.

BIT 11 Forced Output Running forced On/Off for output contact.

BIT 12 STOP by ESTOP function

Immediately stopped by ESTOP function in Run Mode.

BIT 13 I/O Skip Running There is designated I/O module to stop trouble check and data refresh.

BIT 14 Monitor Running Running outside monitor for program and variable.

_SYS_A_STATE WORD

BIT 15 Remote Mode ON Operating in Remote Mode.

Page 154: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-15

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

- Mode and Operation of B CPU

Status Information of mode and operation of A CPU system.

BIT 0 Local Control Operation Mode can be changed only by mode key or by GMWIN.

BIT 1 STOP

BIT 2 RUN

BIT 3 PAUSE(None)

BIT 4 DEBUG

Indicates the operation of CPU.

BIT 5 Operation Mode Change by Key

BIT 6 Change by Local GMWIN에

BIT 7 Change by Remote GMWIN에

BIT 8 Operation Mode Change by Communication

Factor changed into current operation mode.

BIT 9 STOP by STOP function

Stopped after a completion of scan by STOP function in RUN mode.

BIT 10 Forced Input Running forced On/Off for input contact.

BIT 11 Forced Output Running forced On/Off for output contact.

BIT 12 STOP by ESTOP function

Immediately stopped by ESTOP function in Run Mode.

BIT 13 I/O Skip Running There is designated I/O module to stop trouble check and data refresh.

BIT 14 Monitor Running Running outside monitor for program and variable.

BIT 15 Remote Mode ON Operating in Remote Mode.

_SYS_B_STATE WORD

- GMWIN Connection

Path connected with GMWIN and CPU.

BIT 0 Local GMWIN Connection

Connected with connector mounted at CPU module.

BIT 1 Remote GMWIN Connection

Connected with connector in communication module of remote I/O base.

_PADT_CNF BYTE

BIT 2 Remote Communication Connection

Connected with communication line and other PLC.

- Restart Mode Information

BIT 0 Cold Restart

BIT 1 Warm Restart _RST_TY BYTE

BIT 2 Hot Restart

Displayed in restart mode performed to start current running program

_INIT_RUN BOOL BIT 3 Initializing Users are running user’s initialization program.

_SCAN_MAX*1 UINT Max. Scan Time(ms)

Record the max. scan time during operation.

Page 155: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-16

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

_SCAN_MIN*1 UINT Min. Scan Time(ms)

Record the min. scan time during operation.

_SCAN_CUR*1 UINT Current Scan Time(ms)

Update and record the current scan time during operation.

_STSK_NUM*1 UINT Run time check

task designation

Designate the task number to require run time check.

_STSK_MAX*1 UINT Task Scan Time(ms) – Max.

Max. value of task run time designated at _STSK_NUM

_STSK_MIN*1 UINT Task Scan Time( (ms) – Min.

Min. value of task run time designated at _STSK_NUM

_STSK_CUR*1 UINT Task Scan Time( (ms) - Current

Current. value of task run time designated at _STSK_NUM

_RTC_TIME[n] BCD n:0~7 Current Time

BCD data RTC current time

(Ex. :96-01-01-12-00-00-00-20)

_RTC_TIME[0]: Year, _RTC_TIME[1]: Month, _RTC_TIME[2] :Day

_RTC_TIME[3]: Hour, _RTC_TIME[4]: Min., _RTC_TIME[5] :Sec.

_RTC_TIME[6]: Day of Week _RTC_TIME[7]: Century(19XX, 20XX)

Day of Week - 0:Mon, 1:Thues, 2:Wed, 3:Thurs, 4:Fri, 5:Sat, 6:Sun

_SYS_ERR UINT Error Code

Error Type See Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

*1 : Flag Monitoring or Program Write Enable Flag

Redundant Operation Mode Status Information

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

_RED_STATE BYTE - Redundant Operation

Indicates the operation of redundant system.

_RUN_RED BOOL BIT_0 Running Redundant Operation

During redundant operation, normal operation of CPU A, CPU B

_RUN_SA BOOL BIT_1 A Side One-sided Operation

Only CPU A operating one-sidedly in redundant system.

_RUN_SB BOOL BIT_2 B Side One-sided Operation

Only CPU B operating one-sidedly in redundant system.

_A_MASTER BOOL BIT_3 A CPU Master Operation

CPU A operating as a master in redundant system.

_B_MASTER BOOL BIT_4 B CPU Master Operation

CPU B operating as a master in redundant system.

Page 156: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-17

11.7 System Configuration Status Information Flag

User Program Status Information

Key Word Type BIT

Position Content Description

- SW configuration of A CPU system

Display errors by block of user program in A CPU system

BIT 0 Basic Parameter Error

Check and display errors of basic parameter.

BIT 1 I/O Configuration Parameter Error

Check and display errors of I/O configuration parameter.

BIT 2 Program Error Check and display errors of user program.

BIT 3 Access Variable Error

Check and display errors of access parameter.

_DOMAIN_A_ST BYTE

BIT 4 High Link Parameter Error

Check and display errors of highway link parameter.

- SW configuration of B CPU system

Display errors by block of user program in A CPU system

BIT 0 Basic Parameter Error

Check and display errors of basic parameter.

BIT 1 I/O Configuration Parameter Error

Check and display errors of I/O configuration parameter.

BIT 2 Program Error Check and display errors of user program.

BIT 3 Access Variable Error

Check and display errors of access parameter.

_DOMAIN_B_ST BYTE

BIT 4 High Link Parameter Error

Check and display errors of highway link parameter.

Operation Mode Key Status Information

Key Word

Type BIT

Position Content Description

- A CPU Key setting position

Display key switch of A CPU and DIF.

BIT 0 KEY_STOP

BIT 1 KEY_RUN

BIT 2 KEY_PAUSE/REMOTE

Display Mode Key switch setting of A CPU.

-

BIT 4 KEY_B

BIT 5 KEY_A

BIT 6 KEY_A+B

Display Key switch of DIF.

_KEY_A_STATE

BYTE

-

Page 157: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-18

Key

Word Type

BIT

Position Content Description

- Key setting position of B CPU

Display Key switch of B CPU and DIF.

BIT 0 KEY_STOP

BIT 1 KEY_RUN

BIT 2 KEY_PAUSE/REMOTE

Display Mode Key switch setting of BCPU.

BIT 3 -

BIT 4 KEY_B

BIT 5 KEY_A

_KEY_B_STATE

BYTE

BIT 6 KEY_A+B

Display Key switch of DIF.

-

CPU Configuration Status Information

Display the configuration of CPU modules.

BIT 0 GM1/GM2 Display CPU type. GM1:0, GM2:1, redundancy:0

BIT 1 Multi_CPU Configuration

Display when PLC configuration is GM1-Multi CPU.( redundancy:0)

BIT 2 Redundant Configuration

Display when PLC configuration is GMR-redundancy.

BIT 4~7

CPU0~3 Mounting

In case of GM1-Multi CPU of PLC configuration, display the position of mounted CPU and in case of redundant system, set to BIT8 in CPU-A and to BIT9 in CPU-B.

BIT 8~11

CPU Module Mounting Position

In case of GM1-Multi CPU of PLC configuration, display the mounted position of its own and in case of redundant system, set to BIT8 in CPU-A and to BIT9 in CPU-B.

_CPU_

CNF WORD

BIT 12~15

Matched with CPU and resource

If resource built-in CPU module installed in right position, the applicable BIT is set.

_IO_A_

INSTALL

[n]

BYTE n:0~15

I/O Module Mounting Position of A CPU system

A CPU system Indicates the slot position mounted with controllable I/O module in base at Bit-Map.

_IO_B_

INSTALL

[n]

BYTE n:0~15

I/O Module Mounting Position of B CPU system

B CPU system Indicates the slot position mounted with controllable I/O module in base at Bit-Map.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_A_INSTALL[0] 베이스 0

_IO_A_INSTALL[1] 베이스 1

_IO_A_INSTALL[15] 베이스 15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

_IO_B_INSTALL[0] 베이스 0

_IO_B_INSTALL[1] 베이스 1

_IO_B_INSTALL[15] 베이스 15

Base 0 Base 1 Base 15

Base 0 Base 1 Base 15

Page 158: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-19

11.8 Communication Flag - GLOFA Fnet(Fdnet)/Enet/Cnet Flag Table

This describes main flags related to operation of network. For detailed information, see user’s manual of applicable communication module.

Communication System Status Information Flag n indicates the slot number mounted with communication module.(n=0-7)

Key Word Type Applicable

NET Content Description

_CnVERNO UINT Applicable to all

Version No. of Communication Module

Display O/S version number of Communication Module.

_CnSTNOH

_CnSTNOL

UDINT

UDINT Applicable to all

No. of communication module

Indicates the value set at switch of communication module.

Enet : MAC no. displayed at side of comm. module. Fnet/Fdnet : No. Switch value in front of comm. module. Cnet : No. set by frame editor.

_CnSTNOH : No. set in RS232C side. _CnSTNOL : No. set in RS422 side.

_CnTXECNT UINT Applicable to all

Communication Frame Transmission Error

Increased one whenever transmission error occurred in transmission of communication frame. Evaluate communication network for connection. Cnet is the sum of errors occurred when transmitting RS232 and RS422.

_CnRXECNT UINT Applicable to all

Communication Frame Reception Error

Increased one whenever reception error occurred in reception of communication frame. Evaluate communication network for connection. Cnet is the sum of errors occurred when transmitting RS232 and RS422.

_CnSVCFCNT UINT Applicable to all

Communication Service Error

Increased one whenever failed in communication service. Evaluate communication network for connection, its total communication amount and safety of program.

_CnSCANMX UINT Fnet Comm. Scan Time Max.( unit; 1ms)

Max. time elapsed when transmitting transmission frame with TOKEN once at all stations connected with network.

_CnSCANAV UINT Fnet Comm. Scan Time Average( unit; 1ms)

Average time elapsed when transmitting transmission frame with TOKEN once at all stations connected with network.

_CnSCANMN UINT Fnet Comm. Scan Time Min.( unit; 1ms))

Min. time elapsed when transmitting transmission frame with TOKEN once at all stations connected with network.

_CnLINF UINT Selective Application

Communication Module System Status Information

Indicate the operation of communication module in word.

_CnLNKMOD BIT15 Applicable to all

Operation Mode(RUN=1,TEST=0)

Indicates if operation mode of communication set to module normal or test mode.

_CnINRING BIT14 Applicable to all

Communication Participation(IN_RING = 1)

Indicates communication enable(IN_RING = 1) with the other station.

_CnIFERR BIT13 Applicable to all

Interface Error(Error=1)

Indicates interface stopped with communication module.

Page 159: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-20

Key Word Type Applicable

NET Content Description

_CnSVBSY BIT12 Applicable to all

Common-used RAM Lack (Lack=1)

Indicates lack of source in common-used RAM on communication module.

_CnCRDER BIT11 Applicable to all

Communication Module System Error (Error=1)

Indicates H/W or system O/S error of communication module.

_CnCHSEL BIT10 Fdnet Current Operating Channel (CHA=0)

Indicate the channel((cable) being used by current communication module during cable redundant.

_CnCHASTS BIT 9 Fdnet Channel A Indicate the connection of Channel A(Cable A) (normal=1). _CnCHBSTS BIT 8 Fdnet Channel B Indicate the connection of Channel B(Cable B) (normal=1). _CnNETWAR BIT 7 Fdnet Network

Configuration Network configuration error flag

_NETn_LIV[k]

k=0-63

k; station no.

BOOL

ARRAYFnet

Indicate the station connected to network in bit.(1 = Connected, 0 = Disconnected)

Indicate if network connected with remote station with no. K or with local PLC by bit.

This value indicates current network state(write disabled).

_NETn_RST[k]

k=0-63

k; station no.

BOOL

ARRAYFnet

Indicate the station reconnected to network after disconnected..(1 = reconnected, 0 = no change)

Indicates the station reconnected after disconnected from network by bit. To detect next reconnection, always set this value to 0 in user program with latched to ‘1’ in reconnection. (Write Enabled)

_RCVn_232[k]

k=0-63 k; setting no.

BOOL

ARRAYCnet

Indicate user defined fame received by setting number.(Received=1)

When RS422 operated in user defined mode and reception frame received at RS422, BIT corresponding to setting number will be 1 and if reading RCV_MSG F/B, deleted to 0.

_RCVn_422[k]

k=0-63 k; setting no.

BOOL

ARRAYCnet

Indicate user defined fame received by setting number (Received=1)

When RS422 operated in user defined mode and reception frame received at RS422, BIT corresponding to setting number will be 1 and if reading RCV_MSG F/B, deleted to 0.

_RCVn_ECM[k] k=0-15 k; Channel No.

BOOL

ARRAYEnet

Indicate data frame received at applicable communication channel(Received=1)

When data frame received through Enet communication channel, BIT corresponding to setting number will be 1 and if reading RCV_MSG F/B, deleted to 0..

Page 160: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-21

Remote Module Control Flag

n indicates the slot number mounted with communication module.(n=0-7)

Key Word Type Applicable

NET Content Description

_FSMn_RESET

*1 BOOL Fnet

S/W Reset of Remote I/O Station

Ask S/W reset of analogue, digital I/O for remote I/O station. Enabled in respective or overall request according to special module, I/O module initialization, and FSMn_ST_No setting.

_FSMn_IO_

RESET *1 BOOL Fnet

Digital Output Reset of Remote I/O Station

Ask digital output clear for remote I/O station(Write Enabled). Enabled in respective or overall request according to FSMn_ST_NO setting.

_FSMn_HS_

RESET *1 BOOL Fnet

Highway Link Status Information Initialization of Remote I/O station

When instantaneous power failure occurred in remote I/O station, operation mode bit of highway link status information turns off and link trouble set to 1. With this bit ON, operation mode bit turns ON and link trouble sdt and deleted to 0.

Enabled in respective or overall request according to FSMn_ST_NO setting.

_FSMn_ST_NO

*1 USINT Fnet

Remote I/O station no. to perform _FSMn_RESET, _FSMn_IO_RESET_FSMn_HS_RESET

Designate remote I/O station no. to perform _FSMn_RESET, _FSMn_IO_RESET, _FSMn_HS_RESET (Write Enabled)

0-63 => Respectively designated no. /255 => All stations designated

*1 : Flag Monitoring or program write enable flag

Page 161: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-22

Highway Link Status Information Detailed Flag

m indicates the number of highway link parameter(m = 1,2,3,4).

Key Word Type Applicable

NET Content Description

_HSmRLINK BOOL RUN_LINK Status Information of Highway Link

Indicated when all stations operate normally as highway link parameter setting and turned ON in the following conditions.

1. All stations set to Run at parameter setting and no error.

2. All data blocks communicated normally at parameter setting

3. Each station own setting parameter communicated normally at parameter setting.

This flag keeps ON once turned on unless interrupted by link enable.

_HSmLTRBL BOOL

Abnormal Status Information of Highway link (LINK TROUBLE)

When parameter setting station with _HSmRLINK ON and data block communication being as shown in the following, this flag turns ON.

1. If parameter setting station is in Run mode or not,

2. If there is an error in parameter setting station

3. If communication not good in parameter setting data block

This flag set to ON if above conditions occurred and OFF if returned to the normal.

_HSmSTATE[k]

BOOL ARRAY

k=0-63

Integrated communication status information of k data at highway parameter setting

Indicate the state of communication status information for each data block of setting parameter.

_HSmSTATE[k] = _HSmMOD[k] & _HSmTRX[k] & _HSmERR[k]

_HSmMOD[k] BOOL ARRAY

K=0-63

Mode status information of k data block setting station at highway parameter setting (RUN = 1, Others = 0)

Indicate the operation mode of station set to k data block in parameter.

_HSmTRX[k] BOOL ARRAY

K=0-63

Communication status information of k data block at highway parameter setting

(Normal= 1, Abnormal= 0)

Indicate if parameter k data block communicated properly as setting.

_HSmERR[k] BOOL ARRAY

K=0-63

Status Information of k data block setting station at highway parameter setting (Normal= 1, Abnormal= 0)

Indicate if there is an error in parameter k data block setting station.

Page 162: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-23

11.9 Access Pass Registration of Flag Some flag is enabled for variable service through network without controlling user’s program. For operation of flag, data type, size and composition of data block, see between para 11.1 and 11.8.

(1)Access Variable Registration Flag Group Access Variable Name Data Write Enable

11.1 User Flag _INIT_DONE / _RTC_DATE / _RTC_TOD / _RTC_WEEK Writable : _INIT_DONE

11.2 System Error Flag _CNF_ER / _CNF_A_ER / _CNF_B_ER Disabled

11.3 System Fault Mask Flag

_CNF_ER_M / _ANNUN_ER_M /_RIQ_ER_M _BASE_M[n] / _SLOT_M[n] / _BASE_A_S[n] _SLOT_A_S[n] / _BASE_B_S[n] / _SLOT_B_S[n]

Enabled

11.4 System Warning Flag _CNF_WAR / _CNF_AB_WAR Disabled

11.5 System Error and Warding Detailed Flag

_IO_A_TYER_N / _IO_A_TYERR[n] / _IO_B_TYER_N _IO_B_TYERR[n] / _IO_A_DEER_N / _IO_A_DEERR[n] _IO_B_DEER_N / _IO_B_DEERR[n] / _FUSE_A_ER_N _FUSE_A_ERR[n] / _FUSE_B_ER_N / _FUSE_B_ERR[n] _IO_A_RWER_N / _IO_A_RWERR[n] / _IO_B_RWER_N _IO_B_RWERR[n] / _SP_A_IFER_N / _SP_A_IFERR[n] _SP_B_IFER_N / _SP_B_IFERR[n] / _ANC_ERR[n] _ANC_WAR[n] / _ANC_WB[n] / _TC_BMAP[n] _TC_CNT[n] / _BAT_A_ER_TM / _BAT_B_ER_TM _AC_F_CNT / _AC_F_TM[n] / _RIQ_ERR[n] _RIQ_A_ERR[n] / _RIQ_B_ERR[n] / _RIQ_C_ERR[n]

_ANC_ERR[n], _ANC_WAR[n], _ANC_WB[n], _TC_BMAP[n], _TC_CNT[n], _AC_F_CNT, _RIQ_A_ERR[n], _RIQ_B_ERR[n], _RIQ_C_ERR[n]만Write Enable

11.6 System Operation Status Information Flag

_CPU_TYPE / _VER_A_NUM / _VER_B_NUM _MEM_A_TYPE / _MEM_B_TYPE _SYS_A_STATE / _SYS_B_STATE / _PADT_CNF / _RST_TY _INIT_RUN _SCAN_MAX / _SCAN_MIN / _SCAN_CUR _STSK_NUM / _STSK_MAX / _STSK_MIN / _STSK_CUR _RTC_TIME[n] / _SYS_ERR / _RED_STATE

_SCAN_MAX, _SCAN_MIN, _SCAN_CUR, _STSK_NUM, _STSK_MAX, _STSK_MIN, _STSK_CUR만 Write Enable

11.7 System Configuration Status Information Flag

_DOMAIN_A_ST / _DOMAIN_B_ST / _KEY_A_STATE _KEY_B_STATE / _CPU_CNF _IO_A_INSTALL[n] / _IO_B_INSTALL[n]

Disabled

11.8 Communication Flag _FSMn_RESET / _FSMn_IO_RESET _FSMn_HS_RESET / _FSMn_ST_NO Enabled

Page 163: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11-24

(2)Access of Array Variable

• Access of BOOL Array Variable(Ex.: _ANC_WB[n]) − Overall Data Required : _ANC_WB − One Object Required : _ANC_WB[1] • Access of BYTE Array Variable(Ex.: _SLOT_A_S[n]) − Overall Data Required: _SLOT_A_S − One Object Required: _SLOT_A_S[1] − One BIT Write in One Object: _SLOT_A_S[1][0] − One BIT Read in One Object: _SLOT_A_S[1][0] • Access of LWORD Array Variable(Ex.: _RIQ_A_ERR[n]) − Overall Data Required: Access Disabled − One Object Required: _RIQ_A_ERR[1] − One BIT Write in One Object: _RIQ_A_ERR[1][0]

Page 164: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-1

Chapter 12. System Definition

12.1 Basic Parameter As basic parameter necessary in PLC operation, there are memory assignment, restart mode, scan watchdog time and etc.

[Fig. 12.1] Basic Parameter

(1) Configuration(PLC) Name

It means the name representing PLC system. Used to designate PLC system in outer interface through communication module.

(2) PLC control permission by communication

It means the parameter enabled for PLC system to permit/inhibit remote control through FAM and computer communication module excepting GMWIN. If this item designated, operation mode change and program download are enabled through communication.

(3) Restart Mode

Used to set restart mode of PLC system. When restarting system, there can be selected ‘Cold Restart’ or ‘Warm Restart’ according to parameter setting.

(4) Hot Restart

Used to set ‘Hot restart mode’ and ‘hot restart permission time’ of PLC system and permission time can be set up to 23:59:59 in the unit of 1 second.

(5) Resource(CPU) Name

It means unique name of each CPU forming PLC system. Used to designate CPU forming PLC system in outer interface through communication module.

(6) Scan Watchdog

Used to set the maximum permissible time of program on the purpose of checking if user’s program operated normally. It can be set up to 32, 768ms in the unit of 1ms.

Page 165: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-2

(7) %M Area(GMWIN Option Menu)

Used to set the size of Direct Variable area among inner data memory. This memory area is enabled for direct addressing without variable declaration in programming. Available area for %M is limited as parameter setting. Area can be set in option menu of GMWIN.

• Ex. Available Range by Data Type in %M Area Setting Value and Direct Addressing

%M Designation

Bit Range Byte Range Word Range Dword Range Lword Range

1K byte %MX0 ~ 8191 %MB0 ~ 1023 %MW0 ~ 511 %MD0 ~ 255 %ML0 ~ 127

8K byte %MX0 ~ 65535 %MB0 ~ 8191 %MW0 ~ 4095 %MD0 ~ 2047 %ML0 ~ 1023

16K byte %MX0 ~ 31071 %MB0 ~ 16383 %MW0 ~ 8191 %MD0 ~ 4095 %ML0 ~ 2047

32K byte %MX0 ~ 62143 %MB0 ~ 32767 %MW0 ~ 16383 %MD0 ~ 8191 %ML0 ~ 4095

64K byte %MX0 ~ 24287 %MB0 ~ 65535 %MW0 ~ 32767 %MD0 ~ 16383 %ML0 ~ 8191 • In Redundant System, it can be set from 0 byte to 64K byte in the unit of 1K byte. %M area setting has an influence on operation delay time in redundant entry. Don’t set more than as required.

Page 166: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-3

12.2 I/O Configuration Parameter To set module configuration of system to be operated, mount with the slot of each base module and set operation module. If there is difference between setting parameter and actual mounted module, operation is disabled. I/O configuration parameter was set to empty slot(DEF_EMPTY).

Even if I/O configuration parameter set to empty slot(DEF_EMPTY), module type mismatch error may be occurred if actual mounted module exists in power on.

Default module setting is disabled in GMR. Mount I/O configuration Parameter actually and set operation module.

[Fig. 12.2] Base, Slot Selection

[Fig. 12.3] Module Type Selection

Page 167: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-4

Key Word Description Ex. Of Applicable Module

DC Input DC Input Module G3I-D22A(16-point), G3I-D22C(16-point), G3I-D24A(32-point), G3I-D28A(64-point)

AC 110V Input AC 110V Input Module G3I-A12A(16-point), G3I-A14A(32-point)

AC 220V Input AC 220V Input Module G3I-A22A(16-point), G3I-A24A(32-point)

Relay Output Relay Output Module G3Q-RY2A(16-point), G3Q-RY4A(32-point)

SSR Output SSR Output Module G3Q-SS2A(16-point), G3Q-SS4A(32-point)

TR Output TR Output Module G3Q-TR2A(16-point), G3Q-TR4A(32-point), G3Q-TR4B(32-point), G3Q-TR8A(64-point)

Interrupt Input Interrupt Input Module G3F-INTA(16-point)

Analog Timer Analog Timer Module G3F-AT4A(16-point)

A/D A/D Input Module G3F-AD4A(16 Channel)

DAV, DAI D/A Output Module G3F-DA4V(16 Channel, Voltage Type), G3F-DA4I(16 Channel, Current Type)

T/C T/C Input Module G3F-TC4A(16 Channel)

RTD RTD Input Module G3F-RD3A(8 Channel)

PID PID Control Module G3F-PIDB(32 Loop)

HSC High speed counter module G3F-HSCA(2 Channel)

Position Control (Analog)

Position control analog output module G3F-POAA(2 Axes)

Position Control(Pulse)

Position control pulse output module G3F-POPA(2 Axes)

GLOFA Fnet Fieldbus Communication Module

G3L-FUEA

DEF_EMPTY Empty Slot

[Table 12.1] Ex. Of I/O Parameter Setting Table

Page 168: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-5

12.3 Communication Parameter This means the parameter for highway link to set transmit/receive destination, data, period and etc. when transmitting and receiving certain data repetitively through communication module(For details, see communication related manual).

[Fig. 12.4] Communication Module Type Selection

Network Type : Selects the type of communication module Slot Number : Slot position at which communication module mounted Station Number : Indicates station number of module for highway link communication.

[Fig. 12.5] Highway Link Item Setting

Station Type : indicates type of the opposite communication module and sets to Local/Remote. Station Number : Indicates the station where data occurred in Transmit/Receive. Mode : Sets Transmit/Receive. Block Number : Unique number to distinguish data block from the same communication module. Transmit/Receive Period : Sets Transmit/Receive period. Area : Enabled in I,Q,M area selection for data transmission/reception. Sets start address in digit. Size : Sets the number of word of transmit/receive area.

Page 169: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-6

12.4 Redundant Parameter This sets circuit configuration and characteristics for redundant operation.

[Fig. 12.6] Redundant Parameter Main Menu

Base: Base Number set in I/O parameter. Redundant Setting : Sets to Redundant, Switched, and One-sided. Base 0 is set to redundant basic base with CPU mounted.

[Fig. 12.8] Input Circuit Setting

Page 170: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 12. System Definition

12-7

Redundant Base : Designates the position of redundant base to word unit among triplex inputs.

The setting will be applied to both of Base A and Base B. Switched Base: Designates the position of switched base among triplex inputs. Time Monitoring: Sets fault detection time(minimum setting : 20ms)

[Fig. 12.8] Output Circuit Setting

Output Position : Designates the position of output word to set circuit type. Feedback Position : Designates the position of input word to feedback output signal. Feedback Time : Designates the maximum feedback monitoring time. Master Control : When faults detected, sets the position of output contact to be used for load

power off.

[Fig. 12.10] Fault Mask Setting

Master Control Monitoring : Sets the position of input contact to monitor master control output contacts. Number : Sequential Number. Continuous Module Position in a fault: When faults of module occurred, sets the position of module to override this and continue operation. (%IQ[Base No.].[Module Position])

Page 171: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

13-1

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting 13.1 Front Display

CPU Front Display

4 Digit Display 5 Digit Display

Display CPU Module

Description and Remedy

Master/Standby . Indicates remote RUN Master/Standby . Indicates Local RUN Master/Standby . Indicates Stop Master/Standby . Indicates CPU system doing or has done reset.

Master . When pressing Reset Key more than 5 seconds. If key released, restarted in cold restart mode(reset cold).

Master(When starting)

.While operating in cold restart

Master(When starting)

. While operating in warm restart

Master(When starting)

. While operating in hot restart

Master/Standby .While system performing initialization

Master(OS V1.7 or more)

.While performing initialization task

.For OS version 1.6 or less, displayed with ‘r-rUn’, ‘L-rUn’

Standby .While master CPU performing initialization task and standby CPU waiting for.

Standby

.Start operation in Standby mode. Indicated from power on of standby CPU to normal operation. .Standby in this state until normal operation of master when starting CPU operated in standby previously after system shutdown. .If standby restarted forcedly(by setting mode key, reset key, GMWIN or DIF key to single mode) with master off(power off or stop mode), operates in single master.

(xx:0~ff)

(xxx:0~100) Standby

.While starting standby CPU and downloading program from master. .Number indicates the program block number to be copied during download and if master being equal with standby program, download operation omitted(Program download).

(xx:0~ff)

(xx:0~ff)

Standby .If redundant I/O base installed, standby CPU started and downloaded with initialization data of operating special module from mater.

(xx:0~ff)

(xx:0~ff)

Standby . If redundant I/O base installed, standby CPU started and initialization of special module performed using initialization data downloaded from master.

(xxx:0~fff)

(xxx:0~ffff)

Standby

.Standby CPU started and downloaded with program/set value data from master, and then batch downloaded with changed data(dynamic data: I,Q,M,V) during operation to enter normal operation.

(xx:0~99)

(xxx:0~255)

Standby

.If redundant I/O base installed, standby CPU enters normal operation and then aligns special module data installed at redundant I/O base with master data.

Page 172: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

13-2

CPU Front Display

4 Digit Display 5 Digit Display

Display CPU Module

Description and Remedy 4 Digit Display

(x:0~4)

(x:0~4)

Standby .Indicates the cause of Master Change by type.

(xx:0~15)

(xx:0~15)

Master/Standby .During power on standby of extension base in initial start .If base not supplied with power, mark base number and wait for power on(see 8.1.5.1).

Master/Standby

.During power normal return, when AC input power of main or extension base to OFF/Instantaneous Power Failure/Voltage Drop(AC_Fail). .Power Check -> Extension Cable Mounting Check -> Power Module Replacement

Master/Standby .If changed to STOP Mode by ‘USTOP’ function during programming

Master/Standby .Error code(see ‘13.2 Fault Check by error code) Master/Standby . Error code(see ‘13.2 Fault Check by error code) Master/Standby .While deleting data of flash memory module. Master/Standby .While saving program into flash memory module. Master(One-sided) .Displays mode state in debug(only in one-sided operation.

Master(One-sided).Indicates the times of scan when scan break performed in debug mode.

Master(One-sided).Designates the times of break at data break in debug mode and indicates the number of designated break.

Master(One-sided). Designates the times of break at code break in debug mode and indicates the number of performed break.

Master(One-sided) .When step break performed in debug mode Master(One-sided) .When abnormal break performed in debug mode

8888 88888 Master/Standby .Checks the operation of display in initial start.

Page 173: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

13-3

13.2 Troubleshooting by Error Code

Error Code

Cause Remedy Operation LED

Display

(7 SEG) Diagnosis

- CPU(microprocessor) failure or OS ROM Read Disabled

-A/S required if not removed with

power resupply. Failure Fail:ON Power On

02 OS ROM Error -A/S required if not removed with

power resupply. Failure (S 002) Power On

03 OS RAM Error -A/S required if not removed with

power re-supply. Failure (S 003) Power On

04 Clock IC(RTC) Failure -A/S required if not removed with

power re-supply. Failure (S 004) Power On

05 Dedicated Processor failure

-A/S required if not removed with

power re-supply. Failure (S 005) Power On

06 Memory module program not saved due to faulty program memory

-A/S required if not removed with

power on in RUN MODE. Failure (S 006)

Power On

RUN Mode Change

07 Data Memory error -A/S required if not removed with

power re-supply. Failure (S 007) Power On

08 Communication IC error -A/S required if not removed with

power re-supply. Failure (S 008) Power On

09 Interrupt controller error -A/S required if not removed with

power re-supply. Failure (S 009) Power On

- Watchdog error due to congestion of OS program

-Power re-supply RESET Fail:ON During

Operation

101 Installation Position Error of CPU module

-Move to suitable position if CPU

module mounted at disavailable slot. STOP (S 101) Power On

110~

116 CPU misoperation during operation

Restart and if not removed,

Check installation environment. RESET

(S 110

~S 116) During

Operation

-

22 Poor memory module program

-Correct memory module program

and restart(cold)

-Make sure memory module mounting and power re-supply (If memory module program matched with CPU module, restart according to parameter.)

STOP (E 022) RUN Mode

Change

23 Abnormal program

-start(cold) after program reloading

-If battery error, replace battery(cold)

-If error after program reloading, replace CPU module(cold)

STOP (E 023) RUN Mode

Change

Page 174: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

13-4

Error Code

Cause Remedy Operation LED

Display

(7 SEG) Diagnosis

30 Mismatch of mounted module with parameter setting.

-Check wrong slot position in GMWIN, modify module or parameter, and then restart(cold when modifying program).

Reference flag: module type mismatch error flag (_IO_TYER,_IO_TYER_N,

_IO_TYERR[n])

STOP

(RUN) (E 030)

Power On, Program Loading

RUN Mode Change

31 Missing or additional mounting of module during operation

-Check missed/added slot position in GMWIN, correct module mounting, and then restart(as paramter).

Reference flag: module install/remove error flag(_IO_DEER,_IO_DEER_N,_IO_DEERR[n])

STOP

(RUN) (E 031) Scan Stop

32 Disconnection of module attached with fuse during operation.

-Check slot position where fuse disconnection occurred in GMWIN, replace fuse and then restart(as parameter).

Reference flag: Fuse disconnection error flag(_FUSE_ER,_FUSE_ER_N,

_FUSE_ERR[n])

STOP

(RUN) (E 032) Scan Stop

33 Normal access disabled of I/O module data during operation

-Check slot position where access error occurred in GMWIN, replace module and then restart(as parameter).

Reference flag: I/O module read/write error flag

(_IO_RWER,_IO_RWER_N,_IO_RWERR

[n])

STOP

(RUN) (E 033)

Scan Stop

During Programming

34 Normal access disabled of Special/Link module data during operation

-Check slot position where access error occurred in GMWIN, replace module and then restart(as parameter).

Reference flag: Special/Link Module Interface error

rror(_SP_IFER,IP_IFER_N,_IP_IFER[n])

STOP

(RUN) (E 034)

Power On

Scan Stop,

During Programming

35

Redundant I/O Error :

When error occurred in output redundancy or input triplex contacts

-Check redundant contacts where errors occurred using redundant I/O fault detailed item of GMWIN, feedback connection, and module error, and take an action and then restart(as parameter)

Reference Flag: Fault Contact Error Details (_RQ_ERR[n])

STOP

(RUN) (E 035) Scan Stop

40

Program scan time exceeded the specified scan watchdog time in parameter during operation

-Check scan delay watchdog time designated by parameter, modify parameter or program, and then restart(cold)

STOP (E 040) During

Programming

41 Indecipherable command occurred during user programming

- Reload program and restart(cold) STOP (E 041) During

Programming

Page 175: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

13-5

Error Code

Cause Remedy Operation LED

Display

(7 SEG) Diagnosis

42 Stack exceeded normal range during programming

-Restart(cold) STOP (E 042) During

Programming

50

Heavy fault of outside equipment detected by user program during operation

-Heavy fault detection error of external equipment

(_ANNUN_ER,_ANC_ERR[n])

Repair wrong equipment and restart, referring to flag(as parameter)

STOP

(RUN) (E 050) Scan Stop

55 Standby task exceeded the specified range

-Restart and then if occurred continuously, check installation environment(Require A/S if not removed)

STOP

(RUN) (E 055)

During Programming

60 ‘E_STOP’ Function performed

-Remove the cause of ‘E_STOP’ function started in program and restart(cold)

STOP (E 060) During

Programming

300

Redundant system sync operation error

Program and data sync error between CPU during operation or entry of redundant operation

STOP (E 300)

Redundant Operation Entry or During

Operation

301

Standby CPU failed to participate in redundant operation due to Master CPU error.

- When restarting in redundant operation

Set operation mode of standby CPU to

STOP.

Remove errors of master CPU and

restart.

Set operation mode of standby CPU to

RUN.

- When restarting in one-sided operation of standby

Set master CPU to STOP or power OFF

Restart using reset switch of standby

CPU or set operation mode to

STOP RUN.

STOP (E 301) Participated in standby operation

500 Data memory backup disabled

- If no error in battery, restart RUN (E 500) Power On

501 Clock data error - If no error in battery, reset the time using GMWIN and etc.

RUN (E 501) Power On,

Scan Stop

502 Battery voltage drop - Replace battery with power on RUN (E 502) Power On

Scan Stop

Page 176: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-1

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring 14.1 Installation

14.1.1 Installation Environment This equipment can be warranted its reliability and safety when used in the environment specified in general specifications. Take precautions when installing the equipment in order not to miss the environment specified in general specifications. 1) Environmental Conditions

(1) Install in Control Panel available for waterproof and dustproof. (2) Avoid continuous shock or vibration. (3) Do not expose to direct ray of light. (4) Not condensed due to rapid changed temperature. (5) Do not exceed 0~55°C of ambient temperature. (6) Do not exceed 5~95% of relative humidity. (7) No corrosive or flammable gases.

2) Construction

(1) Prevent leftovers entered PLC when machining screw hole or connecting wires. (2) Install where easy to handling. (3) Do not install at the same panel with high voltage equipment. (4) Keep the distance between wiring duct and environmental module more than 100mm. (5) Ground to good noise environment.

3) Radiation Design of Control Panel

(1) If installing PLC in closed control panel, perform radiation design in consideration of its heating as well as heating by the other equipment. If ventilated by means of ventilation fan and commercial fan, it can have an influence on PLC system due to entrance of dust or gas.

(2) It is recommended to install filter or use closed type heat exchanger.

The followings describe how to calculate its own power consumption of PLC system necessary in radiation design.

1) Block Diagram on Power Consumption of PLC system

Power Communication

Communication

Output Relay transistors

Input Special

Load

Page 177: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-2

2) Power consumption by each Part (1) Power Consumption of Power Module

Power Conversion Efficiency of AC Power Module is about 70% and 30% consumed as heating. Three Seventh(3/7) of output power will be its own power consumption. Therefore, calculated as follows. • Wpw = 3/7 (I5V X 5) + (I24V X 24) (W) I5V : Sum of consumption current in each module DC 5V(inside consumption current)

I24V : Sum of average consumption current of external power supply(DC 24V) such as output module and etc. (Not applicable if DC 24V supplied from outside without PLC power)

(2) Sum of Power Consumption in DC 5V Circuit

If the sum(I5V) of inside consumption current of each module calculated, the sum of power consumption in DC 5V circuit of overall system will be calculated as follows. • W5V = I5V X 5 (W)

(3) DC 24V Average Power Consumption(Power Consumption of Number of Simultaneous On Points) If calculating the sum of average consumption current of ‘External Power Supply(DC 24V) in the modules as 24V power supply output module, the sum of DC 24V circuit power consumption is as follows.(This time, PLC self supply and external supply current will be included). • W24V = I24V X 24 (W)

(4) Average Power consumption by Output Terminal Voltage Drop of Output Module(Power Consumption of Number of Simultaneous On Points) If voltage drop occurred between both output terminal in load driving such as TR and SSR output module, calculate the power consumed as a heat in drive element of module. • Wout = Iout X Vdrop X Output Point X Simultaneous On Rate (W) Iout : Output Current(Actually Used) (A) Vdrop : Voltage drop of each output module (V)

(5) Average Power consumption of Input Module(Power Consumption of Number of Simultaneous On Points) • Win = lin X E X Input Point X Simultaneous On Rate (W) Iin : Input Current(Effective Value if AC) (A) E : Input Voltage(Actually Used) (V)

(6) I/O Power consumption of Special Module Calculate the sum of power consumption occurred concerning I/O of special module. • WS = ( I5V, I+15V, I-15V, I24V, I100V, I220V ) (W)

The sum of power consumption as calculated above by block will be overall power consumption of system.

• W = WPW + W5V + W24V + Wout + Win + Ws (W)

Calculate heating amount as this overall power consumption(W) and check temperature rist in control panel. In temperature rise of control panel is calculated as follows. T = W / UA [°C] W : PLC system overall power consumption(as above calculated) A : Area in control panel [m2] U : Uniform temperature in control panel by fan • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6 Without ventilating control panel • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4

Page 178: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-3

14.1.2 Precautions This describes precautions from opening to installing each module.

• Avoid dropped or shocked. • Do not disconnect PCB from case. It can cause a failure. • Prevent foreign matters such as leftovers entered module in wiring. If entered, remove them.

1) Precautions when handling I/O module

This describes precautions when handling or installing I/O module.

(1) Recheck of I/O Module Specification Take precautions of input voltage for Input Module. For output module, if voltage applied exceeded the maximum open/close capacity, it can cause a failure, damage and a fire.

(2) Used Wire

Select the wire in considerations of environment temperature and allowable current and its minimum specifications should be more than AWG20 (0.5mm2).

(3) Environment

If wiring I/O module, away from high temperature equipment or material and do not contact wiring to oil and etc, for long time. Otherwise, it can cause short, damage or wrong operation.

(4) Polarity

Make sure the polarity of module before applying power.

(5) Wiring • If connecting I/O wire together with high voltage line or power line, it can cause induction error and wrong operation or a failure. • Make sure the wire not passed in front of I/O operation display(LED). (It can’t identify I/O mark correctly). • If inductive load connected to output module, connect surge killer or diode in parallel with load. Connect cathode of diode to + of power.

OUT

COM

Output

Inductive Load

Surge Killer

OUT

COM

Output

Inductive Load

Diode

+

-

Page 179: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-4

(6) Terminal

Check that terminal tight connected and prevent leftovers entered PLC in terminal wiring or screw hole machining works. This can cause misoperation or failure.

(7) Besides as above mentioned, do not disconnect PCB board from case.

2) Precautions when attaching with Base

This describes the precautions when attaching PLC at control panel and etc.

(1) Keep sufficient distance between module and structure or parts to facilitate module replacement and ventilation.

(2) Avoid longitudinal connection and horizontal attachment for ventilation. (3) Use different panel or install in separately with vibration source such as large electronic

contactor or no fuse breaker, and etc. (4) Install wiring duct as follows if necessary.

• If installed in the upper of PLC, keep the height of wiring duct less than 50mm for good ventilation. Keep the distance from upper of PLC enough to press HOOK located at top of base.

• If installed in the bottom of PLC, optical cable or coaxial cable can be connected. When bending the connected cable, take considerations of minimum radius.

(5) If the equipment located in front of PLC to avoid radiation noise or heat(located inside of door),

install with a distance of more than 100mm. Install the equipment with a distance of more than 50mm from left/right direction of base.

High Voltage Equipment

Base

Base Other Equip-ment

More than 50mm

Heating Object

More than 100mm

100mm more than

[Fig. 14.1] PLC Attachment

Page 180: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-5

[Fig. 14.2] Distance from Front Equipment [Fig. 14.3] Longitudinal Attachment(Unavailable) [Fig. 14.4] Horizontal Attachment(Unavailable)

PLC

Contactor Relay,

More than 100mm

Page 181: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-6

14.1.3 Removal of Module This describes how to install or remove Power Module, CPU Module, I/O Module, Special Module, and etc. from base. 1) Installing Module

• Insert mounting lug in the bottom of module into module mounting hole of base. • Push top of module and set in base. • Pull top of module and make sure firmly mounted at base.

REMARK

• Always set the module after inserting module-mounting lug into module mounting hole. Attaching excessively can cause pin bent or module broken.

• Especially if used in the place exposed to vibration and shock, set the module into base with screws.

Base

Hook

Module Connector

Module

Module Mounting Lug

Module Mounting Hole

Page 182: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-7

2) Removal of Module

• Take seize the module by hands and push the hook of bash to the end. • While pressing the hook, pull out the module upward with the center of bottom. • While pulling out the module upward, remove mounting lug from module mounting hole.

REMARK

• When removing the module, remove module from base with hook pressed and detach mounting lug from module mounting hole of base. This time, detaching forcedly can cause hook or module mounting lug damaged.

Module

Module Connector

Module mounting hole

Hook

Page 183: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-8

14.2 Wiring This describes the wiring if GM1/2 system used.

14.2. 1 Power Wiring

1) If power change exceeded the specified, connect constant-voltage transformer.

2) Connect the power with small noise between lines and earth. (In case of big noise, connect insulation transformer.) 3) Disconnect I/O and Power Devices from the power of PLC as shown in the following schematic diagram.

4) Connect different power between Redundant System A and B. Install power switch in separately.

Insulation Transformer

PLC Insulation Transformer

I/O Device

AC220V 전

원A

Redundant Basic Base

원B

원A

Switched I/O

Extension Base 전

원B

Redundant I/O Extension

Base A

P

o

Redundant I/O Extension

Base B

A System

B System

Base

Constant-voltage transformer

Power

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er P

ower

AC220V* T1

PLC

*

Main Power PLC Power

I/O PowerI/O Device

Main circuit power Main Circuit

Main Power PLC Power

I/O Power

Main circuit Power

Coil

Power

Page 184: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-9

5) When DC24V output used in power module

Do not connect several power modules in parallel. Otherwise, it can result in module broken. If lack in DC24V output capacity with one power module, supply with external DC 24V as shown

in the following figure.

Redundant power module can be connected with DC24V in parallel. This time, connect wiring in consideration of module replacement.

6) Connect C 110V line, AC 220V line, DC 24V line in the shortest distance as tight as possible. 7) Use AC110V line, AC 220V line as thick as possible to decrease voltage drop. (See 14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification) 8) Keep AC 110V line, DC 24V line away from

main circuit(high voltage, current)line, and I/O signal line. Keep it in the distance more than 100 mm. To prevent surge such as thunder, use serge absorber for preventing thunderbolt as shown in the following figure.

전원

AC LG 24V

I/O

전원

AC LG 24V

E2

PLC I/O Device

E1

Surge Absorber for Thunderbolt protection

Power Supply

전원

ACLG24V

I / O

DC 24V 전원

AC LG

24V

I/O

AC LG

24V

I/O

Power Power

Power

Power Power

Page 185: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-10

Remarks

• Disconnect Earth(E1) of surge absorber for thunderbolt protection and Earth(E2) of PLC. • Select surge absorber for thunderbolt protection not exceeding the max. permissible voltage of surge

absorber when power voltage increased to the maxim.

10) Use insulation shield trans and noise filter to prevent noise entered. 11) Connect the wiring of each input power with twisted as short as possible and do not pass, the wiring of shield trans or noise filter through duct.

14.2.2 I/O Device Wiring (1) The lead specification of I/O wiring is 0.5~2 mm2, but it is recommended to use convenient lead.

(See ’14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification’) (2) Disconnect input line from output line. (3) Disconnect I/O signal line from main circuit line of High Voltage/Great power more than 100mm. (4) If main circuit line not disconnected from power line, use package shield cable and ground PLC. (5) Ground the pipe if wiring connected. (6) Disconnect output line of DC 24V from AC 110V or AC 220V lines. (7) Long wiring more than 200m can cause error due to current leakage by capacity, see Chapter 16,

16.4 Each Example.

14.2.3 Earth Wiring (1) This PLC can be used without grounded with sufficient noise protection excepting there are more

noise. But see the followings in case of ground. (2) Perform dedicated ground if possible.

Ground in Type 3 Ground(Resistance; less than 100Ω). (3) If dedicated ground impossible, do common ground as shown in b) of the following figure.

Input

Output

PLC Shield Cable

RA

DC

Page 186: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-11

A) Dedicated Ground : Very Good B) Common Ground(Good) C) Common Ground : Poor (4) Use ground lead of more than 2mm. Place ground point as near as possible in PLC to shorten the

length of ground line. (5) Ground LG of power module and FG of base board in separately.

A) Dedicated Ground : Very Good B) Common Ground(Good) C) Common Ground : Poor (6) If wrong operation occurred due to ground, disconnect FG of Base from ground. (7) Ground of Redundant Base

• In redundant system, install LG in separately for each system power. • It purposes to prevent simultaneous download of operating system and back up system. • FG is functional ground and installed in separately with LG.

PLC Other Equipment

PLC PLC Other Equipment

Other Equipment

Type 3 Ground Type 3 Ground

FG

C P U A

D I F

C P U B

B

원A

원B

Switched I/O

Extension Base

LG FG LG

FG

LG FG

LGFG

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

Pow

er

A BA B

Page 187: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-12

14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification

The following table describes lead specification used in wiring.

Lead Spec. (mm2) External Connection Type Minimum Maximum

Digital Input 0.5 (AWG20) 1.5 (AWG16)

Digital Output 0.5 (AWG20) 2.0 (AWG14)

Analogue I/O 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)

Communication 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)

Main Power 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)

Protection Ground 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)

[Table 14.1] Lead Specification for External Wiring

Page 188: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14-13

14.3 Trial Operation

This describes what performed before and after trial operation.

14.3.1 Checkpoint before Trial Prior to trial, check the followings.

Checkpoint Description

Extension Cable Connection • Did the connector of Interface Driver/Receiver Module connected with that of extension cable properly?

Interface Module Setting • Did switch setting of Interface Driver/Receiver Module done properly?

Module Mounting • Is configuration name and mounting of module mounted at each slot of Basic and Extension Base good?

Fuse • Didn’t fuse damaged or broken?

Connection of Power Line and I/O line

• Did the cable connected with each terminal matched with signal name? • Is terminal screw torque of power module and I/O module terminal good? • Is current capacity of cable good?

14.3.2 Trial Procedures It describes the procedures of trial operation after a completion of PLC installation.

Power On : 1) Check input power. 2) Check power voltage for I/O device. 3) Set key switch of CPU Module A, B to Stop and mode key of DIF module to ‘A+B’. 4) Set CH On/Off switch of interface driver module. 5) Set Oper switch, base number setting switch and END switch of interface receiver module. 6) Turn on CPU_A side. After starting CPU_A , turn on CPU_B side. 7) Check that Power LED of power module illuminated. 8) Check that Stop LED of CPU module illuminated. 9) Check that Oper LED of Interface Driver Module illuminated. 10) Check that Oper LED of Interface Receiver Module illuminated. (See 5.7.3 How to install Remote Interface Module)

Start

Programming : Perform programming with peripheral equipment, download program in CPU and then testit(see 8.1.3 Initial Operation Start).

Check of external output wiring : Check external output wiring using forced output function of

peripheral equipment(GMWIN).

Check of external input wiring : Check the wiring of input equipment in Monitor Mode of

peripheral equipment(GMWIN).

Page 189: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 15. Maintenance

15-1

Chapter 15. Maintenance Perform daily and regular checks to keep PLC in best state.

15.1 Maintenance and Check PLC module consists of semi-conductor element (except of relay output module) and has semi-permanent life. But regular check is required to prevent error occurred in element due to the environmental effect. The following table describes what should be checked about one or two times 6 months.

Checkpoint Criteria Remedy Temperature 0~+55°C Humidity 5~95%RH

Control operating temperature and humidity properly. Environment

Vibration No Vibration Use vibroisolating rubber or establish other anti-vibration steps.

Rolling of each module No rolling Make sure all modules not rolled. Loose screw of terminal No looseness Tighten if loose. Input Voltage Regulation −15% / +10% 이내 Keep within permissible regulation. .

Spare Parts Check amount and retained state of spare parts

Fill the lack and improve retained state.

∗ If an error or a failure found, replace module. To do this, prepare the minimum spare parts of module.

15.2 Daily Check Consists of daily check as follows.

Checkpoint Content Criteria Remedy

Base Attachment Check the attached screw for loose. Attached firmly. Tighten

Screws

I/O Module Attachment

• Check if screws attached to module tightened firmly. • Check the upper cover of module for missing.

Tightened firmly. Check screws

Loose terminal screws No looseness Tighten Screws

Proximity of pressure connection terminal Proper space Calibrate

Terminal and Extension Cable Connection

Connector of extension cable No loose connector Calibrate

Power LED Check illuminated Illuminated(If error, extinguished) See Chap. 8

Run LED Check illuminated in Run Illuminated(If error, extinguished or flickered) See Chap. 8

Stop LED Check extinguished in Run Extinguished if error See Chap. 8

Input LED Check illuminated or extinguished

Illuminated with Input ON, extinguished with Input OFF See Chap. 8

Output LED Check illuminated or extinguished

Illuminated with Output ON, extinguished with Output OFF See Chap. 8

Display LED

7SEG Display Error Code Display Check No Error Code See Chap. 8

Page 190: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 15. Maintenance

15-2

15.3 Regular Check

Take necessary actions with checking these items about 1 or 2 times 6 months.

Checkpoint Check Method Criteria Remedy Environmental temperature 0~55 °C

Environmental humidity 5~95%RH Environment

Environmental pollution

Measure using thermometer/ hygrometer Measure corrosive gas No corrosive gas

Adjust to general spec.(environment standard in control panel)

Looseness, rolling Move each module Attached firmly PLC State Dust, Foreign

matters Visual Inspection No attachment Tighten screw

Loose Screw Tighten with driver No looseness Tighten Proximity of pressure connection terminal

Visual inspection Proper space Calibrate Connection

Loose Connector Visual inspection No looseness Tighten connector set screw

Power/Voltage Check Measure voltage between AC110 and 220V terminal

AC 85 ~ 132V AC 170 ~ 264V

Change power supply

Battery

Check battery replacement interval, voltage drop indication

• Check the sum of power failure time and warranty period • No battery voltage drop indication

Replace if warranty period expired without battery LOW indication.

Fuse Visual inspection •Not fused

Replace regularly even if not fused. Otherwise, it can cause heating of element by rush current.

15.4 Replacement of Module

It is recommended to stop operation of module and base during operation and replace the module to be installed at base. For procedures, 9.3 Module Replacement During Operation’.

Page 191: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 15. Maintenance

15-3

15.5 Replacement of Battery When back up battery less than the specified voltage(2.6V) for maintaining program and power failure, 501’ will be displayed on 7_SEG in front of CUP.

Remarks

• If system warning flag _BAT_ERR turned On, it indicates battery voltage for memory backup and user

program less than the specified. Replace battery as soon as possible.

Replacement Procedures of Battery

After the life of CPU expired, replace battery. Even if battery disconnected from CPU module, memory back up is enabled for a short time by super capacitor for back up. But replace battery as soon as possible. With CPU power on, it is possible to replace battery.

Replacement of Battery

Open the front cover of CPU.

Push the lug for battery disconnection protection, pull out battery from holder, and disconnect battery connector.

Insert new battery into holder inright direction and connect toconnector.

Close the front cover of CPU.

‘E502’ in 7_SEG? Or is battery error displayed when connected to GMWIN7

Poor new battery

END

No

Battery

Lug for preventing battery disconnection

CPU cover

Page 192: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 15. Maintenance

15-4

Remarks

• Connect battery properly. • Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short, solder, and etc. • Wrong treatment of battery can cause a fire due to heating, broken and flame,

15.6 Replacement of Fuse

Replacement of Fuse

Turn off PLC

Open the front cover of Power Module

Disconnect fuse from fuse holder.

Install new fuse at fuse holder.

Turn on PLC.

Is ‘PWR’ LED illuminated in front of power module?

Yes

END

No

See Power LED extinguished of16.2 Troubleshooting.

Fuse Holder

Page 193: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-1

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting This describes the content, cause and remedy of each error occurred in system operation.

16.1 Principle of Troubleshooting

To improve system reliability, it is important to use the equipment with high reliability, but take an action rapidly when trouble occurred.

To operate system rapidly, find the cause of trouble and take corrective actions rapidly. Take precautions of the followings when performing troubleshooting. (1) Visual Check

Visually check the followings. • Machine operation(stop, operation) • Power • I/O device • Wiring(I/O line, extension and communication cable lines) • Check each display (Power LED, Run LED, Stop LED, I/O LED, and etc.) and then connect with peripheral equipment and check PLC operation and program.

(2) Error Check Observe how errors changed by the following control

• Set key switch to STOP and turn On/Off.

(3) Range Limitation Estimate the cause of trouble as above mentioned.

• PLC? External? • I/O Module? Others? • Sequence Program?

16.2 Troubleshooting

This describes how to fine trouble and error code with divided into content and remedy.

Trouble

If Power LED extinguished

If output module operates abnormally

If program disabled to write

If displaying error code on 7 SEG. LED.

Go to flow if Power LED extinguished

Go to flow if output module operates abnormally

Go to remedy if communication not connected normally

See Chapter 13. program troubleshooting

Page 194: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-2

16.2.1 Flow if Power LED extinguished This describes remedy procedures if Power LED extinguished on power on or during operation.

Power LED extinguished

Is power supply enabled?

Is power voltage set to AC

85~132 or AC 170~ 264V?

Is fuse disconnected?

Is power module set?

Is over-current protection operated?

Fill in troubleshooting questionsheet and then contact localA/S center or agent.

Power Supply.

Is Power LED

illuminated?

Set power supply within thespecified.

Replace fuse.

Supply power module.

Is Power LED illuminated?

Is Power LED illuminated?

Is Power LED illuminated?

1) Check current capacity anddecrease excessive current. 2) Turn off and then on inputpower.

Is Power LED illuminated?

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

END

Yes

Page 195: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-3

16.2.2 Remedy if Fail LED illuminated This describes remedy procedures if Fail LED illuminated on power on.

16.2.3 Remedy if 7-SEG code displayed S

This describes remedy procedures if 7-SEG code displayed S on power on.

7-SEG code displayed E

Fail LED illuminated

Contact local A/S center or

agent.

7-SEG displayed S

Contact local A/S center oragent.

Page 196: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-4

16.2.4 Remedy if 7-SEG code displayed E

Stop LED flickered

Read error code of systemflag.

Program Error?

Take an action according toerror content.

Program Error?

Fill in troubleshootingquestion sheet and thencontact local A/S center oragent. END

Correct the program becauseof S/W error.

Set operation mode to stop.

Write the program.

Set operation mode to Run.

No

Yes

Yes

No

Page 197: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-5

16.2.5 If Output Module Operates Abnormally This describes remedy procedures if Load of output module will not ON during operation.

No

Output load will not ON.

Check output in monitor modeof peripheral equipment.

Is output module LED illuminated?

No

Yes

Is output module LED

illuminated?

Is power voltage approved for load?

Is voltage between each output and COM terminal of

output module normal?

Poor output module. Replaceoutput module.

Replace module.

Check power wiring for loadand turn on the power again.

Yes

Is Fuse disconnection display of output module

illuminated?

No

Replace output common fuse.

Abnormal

load

voltage Normal load voltage

In case of module without fuse

Yes

Yes

Check No

Change output load and setMax. Simultaneous On currentof load to the specified.

Check rush current if loadturned on simultaneously

Is output common

fuse disconnected even

if fuse replaced?

END

Yes

No

Page 198: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-6

16.2.6 Remedy if communication not connected properly. This describes remedy procedures if program write disabled in CPU module.

Program Write disabled

Set key switch to remote stop mode and run program write. Is key switch set to

remote stop mode?

No

Yes

S? Using peripheral equipment, readerror code and correct it.

Yes

Page 199: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-7

16.2.7 Remedy of Interface Module Trouble

FAIL LED

Driver

If mounting position error of driver, turn off and then correct it. If no error in position, contact A/S center.

Receiver

.In case of wrong mounting position of receiver, turn off and then correct it. .Check if multi receiver installed at desired extension base.. If no error, contact A/S center.

OPER LED OFF

Driver

.Check CPU module installed in its position. . If mounting position error of driver, turn off and then correct it. If not corrected, contact A/S center.

Receiver

.Check OPER switch set to Y. .Check that CH ON/OFF switch of connected driver to ON. . In case of wrong mounting position of receiver, turn off and then correct it. .Check cable installed properly. .Check power module LED for power supply. If not corrected, contact A/S center.

CH ERROR LED ON

Driver

.Check cable for connection. .Connect OUT of driver to In of receiver and OUT of receiver to IN of receiver. .Check that power supplied to connected extension base. .Check power module LED illuminated. .Check CH ON/OFF switch set properly. .Set receiver connecting CH to ON and the others to OFF. .Check OPER switch and END switch of connected driver set properly. .Set END switch of termination receiver to ‘Y’ and the others to ‘N’. . . If not corrected, contact A/S center.

Page 200: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-8

16.3 Troubleshooting Question Sheet

If errors occurred while using PLC in GMR redundant series, fill in this question sheet and contact A/S center by telephone or fax. For errors related special and communication modules, fill in the question sheet attached to applicable user’s manual. . 1. User Information: Name Tel.) Firm Name FAX)

2. Used type :

3. Applicable Equipment Details CPU Module Details : OS Version ( ), Product Serial No. ( ) GMWIN Version No. used in program compile : ( )

4. Control Equipment and System Overview : 5. Used Mode of CPU: By key switch ( ), By GMWIN or communication ( ) Memory Module Operation ( )

6. Is Fail LED of CPU module illuminated? Yes( ), No( )

7. Error Code displayed on 7-SEG of CPU module front display :

8. Error Message by GMWIN:

9. Initialization Program Used : Initialization Program ( )

10. Remedy on error code of 7 :

11. Troubleshooting tried to remove other errors : 12. Characteristics of error Repetition( ) : Periodic( ), Related to specific sequence( ), Related to environment( ) Intermittent( ) : General error interval :

13. Detailed description of errors : 14. Applicable system block diagram :

Page 201: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-9

16.4 Each Example

This describes trouble type and remedy for each circuit. 16.4.1 Trouble Type and Remedy of Input Circuit

This describes trouble example and remedy for input circuit.

Situation Cause Remedy

Input signal will not off

Leakage current of external equipment (If driven with proximity switch and etc. )

Input signal will not off(with neon lamp illuminated)

Leakage current of external equipment (Driven by limit switch with neon lamp attached)

Connect proper resistance and capacitor to keep the voltage between terminals below return voltage. CR value will be determined according to

leakage current. − Recommended C : 0.1 ~ 0.47uF R : 47 ~ 120 Ω (1/2W)

Or install the circuit in separately.

Input Signal will not off

Leakage current by capacity between leads of wiring cable

Apply the power at external equipment as shown in the following figure.

Input Signal will not off

Leakage current of external equipment (Driven by switch with LED attached)

Connect proper resistance to keep the voltage between input module terminal and common terminal more than off voltage as shown in the following figure.

Input Signal will not off

Circulating current by another plural power If E1 > E2, circulated

Keep plural power to single. Connect circulating current protective

diode(Following figure)

~외부기기

AC Input

누설전류

외부기기

DC Input

R누설전류

DC Input

L E1 E2

C

~외부기기

AC Input

R누설전류

C

~외부기기

AC Input

R누설전류

C

~

AC Input

R

AC Input

~외부기기

DC Input

R

DC Input

L E1 E2

Leakage current

Leakage current

Leakage current

Leakage current

External equipment

External equipment

External equipment

External equipment

External equipment

Page 202: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-10

~

16.4.2 Trouble Type and Remedy of Output Circuit This describes example and remedy of trouble for output circuit.

Situation Cause Remedy

Load applied with excessive voltage with Output Contact Off

If load half-wave rectified inside).

(This occurred in solenoid valve) If the polarity set to , C will not be

charged and set to polarity , voltage plus power voltage charged at C be applied at both end of diode(D). Maximum voltage is about 2√2. NOTE) If used as above mentioned, there is no problem in output element, but degradation of diode(D) in load can cause errors.

Connect the resistance of tens kΩ ~

hundreds kΩ.

Load will not off

Leakage current by surge absorption

circuit connected with output element in parallel.

Connect the resistance of several tens kΩ

or equivalent impedance CR to load. NOTE) If wiring length longer from output module to load, leakage current can be occurred due to capacity between lines.

In case of C-R type timer, time error

Leakage current by surge absorption

circuit connected with output element in parallel.

Drive C-R type timer with relay.

Use besides C-R type timer. NOTE) Inside circuit may be half-wave rectified according to timer.

C R

LoadOutput

~X

T Timer

Output

~

CR ~

Load

C R ~

Load

누설전류

Output

R

Load

R

Load

C

CR ~

Load

R

D Output

Leakage current

Leakage current

Page 203: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-11

Situation Cause Remedy

Load will not off(For AC)

Circulating current by another two power used If E1< E2, circulated If E1 set to Off(E2 to On), circulated

Make plural current as single. Connect circulating current preventive

diode(following figure). Note) If load being relay and etc., it is necessary to connect diode for absorbing counter voltage as dashed line as shown in the figure.

Load

E1E2

OutputOutput

Load

E1E2

Page 204: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-12

Trouble Type and Remedy of Output Circuit(Continued)

Situation Cause Remedy

Abnormally Long Off Response Time of load

Excessive current in OFF [If driving stream load(Large time

constant L/R) as large current as solenoid with transistor output] t

Because current flows through diode when transistor output Off, there can be delay more than 1 second according to load.

Insert magnetic connector with small time constant and drive load with its contacts.

Broken transistor for output

Rush Current of incandescent lamp When illuminated, rush current more than 10 times may be flown.

To inhibit rush current, flow dark current

between one third(1/3) and one fifth(1/5) of rated power in incandescent lamp.

Output

Load

E1

Current in OFF

Output

Load E1

Output

E1

Output

E1

Output

E1

R

R

Sink type TR output

Source type TR output

Page 205: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16-13

Empty Page

Page 206: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17-1

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17.1 Outside Dimension(Unit:mm)

17.1.1 Redundant Interface Module

130.5 35

Page 207: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17-2

17.1.2 Remote Interface Module

250

118 35

Page 208: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17-3

17.1.3 Redundant Base

E

D C

A

B

GMR-B02M

D C

A

B

GMR-B04M E

Page 209: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17-4

(Unit : mm)

Items A B C D E

GMR−B02M 424 439 230 250 31.5 Basic Base GMR−B04M 564 579 230 250 31.5

GMR−B08E 480 495 230 250 16.5 Extension Base GMR−B12E 620 635 230 250 16.5

E

D C

A

B

GMR-B08E(Same Configuration in GMR-B12E)

Page 210: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17-5

17.1.4 Power Module

128

250

Page 211: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17-6

17.1.5 Extension Cable

Mounting Position Length (m) Mounting Position Length (m) G2C-E031 0.3 G2C-E402 40 G2C-E061 0.6 G2C-E502 50 G2C-E121 1.2 G2C-E602 60 G2C-E401 4 G2C-E702 70 G2C-E601 6 G2C-E802 80 G2C-E102 10 G2C-E902 90 G2C-E202 20 G2C-E103 100 G2C-E302 30

17.1.6 Memory Module

Connector 21

17

53

Page 212: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-1

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1.1 System Block Diagram This shows the block diagram of Redundant system. It consists of CPU, Power, I/O, Remote I/O communication Redundancy. For network Redundancy between PLC and with higher next system, see ‘Communication Redundancy’ manual.

Redundant Basic Base # 0

Base # 1 (switched)

Base # 2 (Redundant−A)

Base # 2 (Redundant−B)

Remote Station 16

0

E U E A

1

F U E A

2

FDIA

3 CPUIA

DIF

CPUIB

0

EUEA

1

FUEA

2

F D I A

3

Power Mo

PowerM

odule

PowerM

odule

Power Mo

Power Mo

0

Input

32

1

Input

32

2

Input

32

3

Input

32

4

Input

32

5

Output 32

6 A D16

7 D A 16

F R I C

F RI C

PowerM

odule

PowerM

odule

Power Mo

0

In put

32

1

Input

32

2

Output 32

3

Output 32

4

Output 32

5

Input

32

6 A D16

7 D A16

F R I C

I / F

PowerM

odule

Power Mo

0

In put

32

1

Input

32

2

Output 32

3

Output 32

4

Output 32

5

Input

32

6 A D16

7 D A16

F R I C

I / F

PowerM

odule

Power Mo

0

Input

32

1

Input

32

2

Input

32

3

Output 32

4

Output 32

5

Output 32

6 A D 16

7 D A 16

RBRA

Power Mo

PowerM

odule

PowerM

odule

Page 213: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-2

A1.2 Function Setting by Module This shows the example of function setting by module. In the system where only switching I/O used, slot between 4 and 7 of ‘Base #1’ is only applicable For I/O Redundancy, refer to slot between 0 and 3 of ‘Base #1’ and ‘Base #2-A’ and ‘Base #2-B’ For remote I/O, refer to ‘Remote Station 16’.

Base #1 Position Usage Related Circuit

0slot Triplex Assigned Input : Overall Process Data *1 (Triplex Input1) 1slot Triplex Assigned Input: Detailed Data of Each Process *2 (Triplex Input 2)

2slot Input(Switched Input) Set No. 0 Contact to 0 of 2 slot in #2-A (Output Power Off) Set No. 1 Contact to 0 of 2 slot in #2-A (Output Power Off)

*3 (Redundant Output 1)

3slot Input(Switched Input) Monitor Redundant Output Contact(3slot of #2-A,B)

*4 (Redundant Output 2)

4slot Input(Switched Input) : BCD Counter of Product Output None 5slot Output(Switched Output) : BCD Indicator of Product Output None 6slot Switched A/D Input Module None 7slot Switched D/A Output Module None

Base #2-A Position Usage Related Circuit

0slot Triplex Assigned Input : Overall Process Data *1 (Triplex Input 1) 1slot Triplex Assigned Input: Detailed Data of Each Process *2 (Triplex Input 2)

2slot Redundant Output Set No. 0 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-A Set No. 1 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-B(not connected)

*3 (Redundant Output 1)

3slot Redundant Output : Overall Process Output (Provide with Fault Contact Check Function)

*4 (Redundant Output 2)

4slot Redundant Output : Detailed Output of Each Process (Provide each A and B base with Fault Contact No. Check and Auto Shut Off function. )

*3 (Redundant Output 1)

5slot Monitor output contact of 4 slot in #2-A *3 (Redundant Output 1)

6slot Redundant A/D Input Module *Special Redundant 1

7slot Redundant D/A Output Module *Special Redundant 2

Base #2-B

Position Usage Related Circuit 0slot Triplex Assigned Input: Overall Process Data *1 (Triplex Input 1) 1slot Triplex Assigned Input: Detailed Data of Each Process *2 (Triplex Input 2)

2slot 이중화 출력 Set No. 0 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-A(not connected) Set No. 1 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-B

*3 (Redundant Output 1)

3slot Redundant Output : Overall Process Output (Provide with Fault Contact Check Function)

*4 (Redundant Output 2)

4slot Redundant Output : Detailed Output of Each Process (Provide each A and B base with Fault Contact No. Check and Auto Shut Off function. )

*3 (Redundant Output 1)

5slot Monitor output contact of 4 slot in #2-A *3 (Redundant Output 1)

6slot Redundant A/D Input Module *Special Redundant 17slot Redundant D/A Output Module *Special Redundant 2

Page 214: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-3

Remote 16 Station

Position Usage Related Circuit 0slot Remote Input : Product End Item Loading BCD Counter None 1slot Remote Input None 2slot Remote Output : Product Raw Material Loading BCD Indicator None 3slot Remote Output : Product Output BCD Indicator None 4slot Remote Output None 5slot Remote Output None 6slot Remote A/D Input Module None 7slot Remote D/A Output Module None

A1.3 Function Setting by Contact According to ‘Appendix 1-2 Function Setting by Module’ as above-mentioned, only the related parts will be indicated with contact number. This part shall be registered in parameter. When programming, do not divide into A and B for I/O Redundancy and treat as one contact.

Position Usage Related Contact %IW1.0.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW2.0.0 %IW1.1.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW2.1.0

%IW1.2.0 Input(Switched Input) %IX1.2.0 %IX1.2.1

%QX2.2.0(A) %QX2.2.1(B)

%QW1.3.0 Monitor Redundant Output Contact of Slot in Base #2 %QW2.3.0 %QW1.4.0 Input(Switched Input) None %QW1.5.0 Output(Switched Output) None

Position Usage Related Contact %IW2.0.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW1.0.0 %IW2.1.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW1.1.0

%QW2.2.0 Redundant Output(Used for Shut Off) %QX2.2.0 %QX2.2.1

%QW2.4.0 %QW2.4.1

%QW2.3.0 Redundant Output Senses Fault Contact Number %IW1.3.0

%QW2.4.0 Redundant Output Senses Fault Contact Number and Base Position(DC Output) Auto Shutoff of Operating Power

%IW2.5.0 %QX2.2.0/1 (A,B)

%IW2.5.0 Monitor Redundant Output Contact of Slot 4 in Base #2 %QW2.4.0

Page 215: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-4

A1.4 Project This shows overall configuration of ex. Program. For parameter and variable, see applicable section of this manual. Here only the content of program will be provided. The following configuration component can be applied selectively according to its own system configuration.

• ‘SP_INITIAL’ ; as restart program, must be prepared when using special module.

• ‘SP_HINITIAL’ ; prepared only if setting hot restart. • ‘_ERR_MASK’ ; Ex. of error task program.

• 'SW_ANALOG’ ; Ex. of special module related program in Switched I/O. • ‘SW_I/O’ ; Ex. of I/O contact in Switched I/O.

• ‘RED_ANALOG’ ; Ex. of special module related program in Redundant I/O. • ‘RED_IO’ ; Ex. of I/O contact in Redundant I/O.

• ‘RED_CHECK’; Ex. of status processing program for Redundant contact.

• ‘REMOTE_ANALOG’ ; Ex. of special module processing program in Remote. • ‘REMOTE_IO’; Ex. of I/O contact in Remote.

Project→ PLC Type : GMR Writer : Hong Kil Dong Configuration(PLC) → Name : GMR_DEMO Configuration Global Variable → 7 declared. Access Variable → one declared. Resource(CPU) 0 → Name: RES0 Resource Global Variable → 0 declared. Task Definition → 3 Defined. [LD] Program → SP_INITIAL (Positioning start with Task _INT) : c:\gmwin30\source\sp_initial.src [LD] Program → SP_HINITIAL (Positioning start with Task _H_INT) : c:\gmwin30\source\sp_hinitial.src [LD] Program → _ERR_MASK (Positioning start with Task _ERR_SYS) : c:\gmwin30\source\err_mask.src [LD] Program → SW_ANALOG : c:\gmwin30\source\sw_analog.src [LD] Program → SW_I/O : c:\gmwin30\source\sw_io.src [LD] Program → RED_ANALOG : c:\gmwin30\source\red_analog.src [LD] Program → RED_IO : c:\gmwin30\source\red_io.src [LD] Program → RED_CHECK : c:\gmwin30\source\check_io.src [LD] Program → REMOTE_ANALOG : c:\gmwin30\source\remote_analog.src [LD] Program → REMOTE_IO : c:\gmwin30\source\remote_io.src Direct Variable Comment → 0 declared. Parameter Basic Parameter I/O Parameter I/O Highway Link Parameter I/O Redundancy Parameter Inserted Library Files c:\gmwsin30\lib\communi.rfb c:\gmwsin30\lib\redutil.rfb c:\gmwsin30\lib\remote3.rfb c:\gmwsin30\lib\special.rfb

Page 216: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-5

A1.5 Ex. Of Program C : \gmwin30\source\sp_initial.src

Go to next page

Row 17

### ------ Special Module Initialization when restarting COLD & WARM

ADFTEN

STAT

RE Q DONE

1

6

ADCHEN

ADTYPE

ADFTVAL

BASE

SLOT

CH

FILT

_VAL

FILT

_EN

DATA

TYPE

SADINIT

AD4INI

ACT

# ------ Analog Input Module Initialization of Switched Base

AVGEN

AVGSEL

NTIME

AVG_

EN

AVG_

SEL

NUM_

TIME

# ------ Analog Output Module Initialization of Switched Base

BASE 1

7

DACHEN

DASEL

SDAINIT

DA4INI

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATA

TYPE DATYPE

SLOT

CH

ACT

SEL

### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization of Redundant Base

Row 30

Comment

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

Row 9

Comment

Row 14

Comment

Row 16

Row 18

Row 19

Row 20

Row 21

Row 22

Row 23

Comment

Row 25

Row 26

Row 27

Row 28

Row 29

Row 31

Row 10

Row 11

Row 12

Row 13

BASE 2

0

ADCHEN

RADINIT

RAD4INI

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATA

TYPE ADTYPE

SLOT

CH

ACT

• Program Description : In Cold or Warm Restart, initialize special module installed at No. 1 and No. 2 Base. When positioning start, start function block once (OFF -> ON) and connected to bus unconditionally. • Function Block Description: AD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at Switched Base. DA4INI : Initialization Function Block of D/A Module installed at Switched and Redundant Base. RAD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at Redundant Base.

Page 217: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-6

Comment

# ------ Analog Output Module Initialization of Redundant Base

BASE 2

1

DACHEN

DASEL

RDAINIT

DA4INI

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATA

TYPE DATYPE

SLOT

CH

ACT

SEL

# ------ COLD & WARM Restart Initialization End-------#

Comment

Row 43

Row 35

Row 36

Row 37

Row 38

Row 39

Row 40

Row 41

Row 44

Row 34

Row 45

SADINIT.DONE

SDAINIT.D ONE

RADINIT.DONE

RDAINIT.DONE

( )

_INIT_DONE

From the previouspage

• Program Description : Check if initialization of special module completed, turn ON _INIT_DONE flag to exit initialization program and then enter scan program.

Page 218: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-7

C : \gmwin30\source\sp_hinitial.src

Comment

Row 17

### ------ Special Module Initialization in Hot Restart.

ADFTEN

1OFF

STAT

RE Q DONE

1

6

ADCHEN

ADTYPE

ADFTVAL

BASE

SLOT

CH

FILT

_VAL

FILT

_EN

DATA

TYPE

SADINIT

AD4INI

ACT

Row 30

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

Row 9

Comment

Row 10

Row 11

Row 12

Row 13

Row 14

Row 16

Row 18

Row 19

Row 20

Row 21

Row 22

Row 23

Row 25

Row 26

Row 27

Row 28

Row 29

1OFF

### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization in Switched Base

AVGEN

AVGSEL

NTIME

AVG_

EN

AVG_

SEL

NUM_

TIME

### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization in Switched Base

BASE1

7

DACHEN

DASEL

SDAINIT

DA4INI

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATA

TYPEDATYPE

SLOT

CH

ACT

SEL

BASE1

7

DACHEN

SDAWR

DA4AWR

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATASDAOUT

SLOT

CH

ACT

### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization in Redundant Base

1OFF

BASE2

6

ADCHEN

RADINIT

RAD4INI

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATA

TYPEADTYPE

SLOT

CH

ACT

• Program Description : In Hot Restart, initialize special module installed at No. 1 and No. 2 Base. As Function Block memorized previous REQ status(ON), turn OFF(I_10FF condition) and then restart(ON -> OFF -> ON). • Function Block Description : AD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at Switched Base. DA4INI : Initialization Function Block of D/A Module installed at Switched and Redundant Base. RAD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at Redundant Base.

• Program Description : As output value of D/A module deleted due to restarting, re-output with the value before stopped if necessary. • If programmed enable to write output value immediately after entered scan program, ‘DA4AWR’ and ‘RDA4AWR’can be omitted.

Go to next page

Page 219: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-8

Row 34

Row 35

Row 36

Row 37

Row 38

Row 39

Row 40

Row 41

Row 42

Comment

Comment

Row 44

Row 45

SEL

### ------ Analog Output Module Initialization in Redundant Base

1OFF

### ------ HOT Restart Initialization END

BASE 2

7

DACHEN

DASEL

RDAINIT

DA4INI

STAT

RE Q DONE

DATA

TYPE DATYPE

SLOT

CH

ACT

DATA

A_AC

T

CH

A_ST

AT

A_DO

NE2 BASE

RDAWR

RDA4AWR

RE Q DONE

7

RDAOUT

SLOT

B_DO

NE

B_ST

AT

B_AC

T

DACHEN

SADINIT.DONE

SDAWR.DONE

RADINIT.DONE

RDAWR.DONE

( )

_INIT_DONE

Continued From Previous Page

• Program Description : Check if initialization of special module and writing to D/A Module completed, turn ON _INIT_DONE flag to exit initialization program and then enter scan program.

Page 220: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-9

C : \gmwin30\source\err_mask.src C : \gmwin30\source\sw_analog.src C : \gmwin30\source\sw_io.src (Ex. of Program Omitted)

# ------ No. 4, 5 Slot Fault Mask of Base No. 1

Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Comment

EN0 EN

OUT_SLOT_M[1] IN1

16#30

_SLOT_M[1]

OR

IN2

DATA

ACT

DONE

STAT

RE Q DONE

1

6

ADRDCH

BASE

SLOT

CH

SADRD

AD4ARD

SADRD.DAT

A

MODIFY

ADMODIFY

RE Q

DATA

_IN

SDAOUT

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Comment

Row 1

# ------ Analog I/O of Switched Base

DATA

ACT

STAT

RE Q DONE

1

7

DAWRCH

BASE

SLOT

CH

SDAWR

DA4AWR

SDAOUT

• Program Description : To prevent fault occurred in the module installed at slot No. 4 and 5 of Base No. 1, write mask data 2#0011_0000(16#30) in _SLOT_M[1]. • When using actually, it is convenient to check the condition, determine if masked or not and set unconditioned run as shown in the example at parameter.

• Program Description : Read A/D module value installed at slot No. 6 of switched base(No. 1) and output to D/A module installed at slot No. 7. • Function Block Description AD4ARD : Function Block reading value and status of A/D module. ADMODIFY : User Defined Function Block receiving A/D value and making it enable to be output DA4AWR : Function Block outputting data to D/A Module.

• Program Description : Read Input Contact Value installed at slot No. 4 of Switched Base(No. 1) and output to Output Contact installed at slot No. 5.

Page 221: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-10

C : \gmwin30\source\red_analog.src C : \gmwin30\source\red_io.src C : \gmwin30\source\check_io.src (Ex. of program omitted)

RADRD

RAD4ARD

2

6

ADRDCHEN

Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

Row 9

Row 10

Row 11

# ------ Analog I/O of Redundant Base Comment

RE Q DONE

A_DO

NE

A_ST

AT

A_AC

T

A_DA

TA

B_DO

NE

B_ST

AT

B_AC

T

B_DA

TA

RADRD A_D

ONE

RADRD A_A

CT

RADRD A_D

ATA

RADRD B_D

ONE

RADRD B_A

CT

RADRD B_D

ATA

BASE

SLOT

CH

A_DON

E

A_AC

T

A_DA

TA

B_DO

NE

B_AC

T

B_DA

TA

DATA

_OUTSELDATA

DATASEL

ADDATASEL

RE Q DONE

MODIFY

ADMODIFY

SELDATA

RE Q DONE

DATA

IN

DATA

_OUT

RDAOUT

DAWRCHEN

RDAWR

RDA4AWR

RE Q DONE

2

7

RDAOUT

BASE

SLOT

CH

DATA

A_DO

NE

A_ST

AT

A_AC

T

B_DO

NE

B_ST

AT

B_AC

T

Comment

### ------ I/O Input of Redundant Base

### ------ Output Control for overall process data input of Redundant Base

OUT

DONE

%IW2.0.0

MCTRL

MAIN_CTRL RE Q

IN %QW2.3.0

Comment

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Comment

OUT

DONE

%IW2.1.0

SCTRL

STEP_CTRL RE Q

IN %QW2.4.0

### ------ Output Control for detailed data input of each process in Redundant Base

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

• Program Description : Read a pair A/D value installed at slot No. 6 of Redundant Base No. 2 and output equal value to both two D/A Modules installed at slot No. 7 of Base No. 2. • Function Block Description : RAD4ARD : Function block reading and outputting both of value and status of Redundant A/D. ADDATASEL: User defined function block outputting only normal value from two A/D values.

ADMODIFY : User defined function block reading A/D value and making data enable to bet t

• Program Description : Read input value of triplex system, calculate operation and then output to Redundant output module. • Function Block Description : MAIN_CTRL : User defined function block running control algorithm of main process. STEP_CTRL : User defined function block processing detailed

• Program Description: Check error of Redundant output contact, notify to operator or repair, and then prepare additional program by deleting fault flag according to operator’s instruction. Refer to Error Flag:_RIQ_ER, _RIQ_ER_M, _RIQ_ERR[n], _RIQ_A_ERR[n], _RIQ_B_ERR[n], _RIQ_C_ERR[n] etc. utilized.

Page 222: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-11

C : \gmwin30\source\remote_analog.src

# ------ Analog I/O of Remote 16 Station

RMTDAINT. ERR

RMTDAWR.E RR

( R )

RMTDAINTEN

DATA

_OUT

DONE

DASEL SEL

CH

ERR

RE Q NDR

1

16

0

6

CHEN

ADTYPE

NET_

NO

ST_N

O

BASE

SLOT

CH

DATA

TYPE

RMTADINT

ADR4INI

( S )

RMTADINTEN

T200MS RMTADINTE N

STAT

ACT

T200MS RMTDAINTE N

ERR

RE Q NDR

1

16

0

7

CHEN

ADTYPE

NET_

NO

ST_N

O

BASE

SLOT

DATA

TYPE

RMTDAINT

DAR4INI

STAT

ACT

T200MS RMTADINTE N

ERR

RE Q NDR

1

16

0

6

CHEN

NET_

NO

ST_N

O

BASE

SLOT

CH

RMTADRD

ADR4RD

STAT

ACT

Row 30

Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

Row 9

Comment

Row 10

Row 11

Row 12

Row 13

Row 14

Row 15

Row 16

Row 17

Row 18

Row 19

Row 20

Row 21

Row 22

Row 23

Row 24

Row 25

Row 26

Row 27

Row 28

Row 29

Row 31

( S )

RMTDAINTEN

RMTADRD.D

ATA

MODIFY

ADMODIFY

RE Q

DATA

_IN

RMTDAOUT

RMTDAINTEN

ERR

RE Q NDR

1

16

0

7

RMTDAOUT

NET_

NO

ST_N

O

BASE

SLOT

CH

DATA

RMTDAWR

DAR4WR

STAT

ACT

CHEN

RMTADINT. ERR

RMTADRD.E RR

( R )

RMTADINTEN

• Program Description : Initialize A/D and D/A modules installed at Remote. Check initialization condition every 200ms. • Function Block Description : ADR4INI : Function block initializing A/D Module of Remote DAR4INI : Function block initializing D/A Module of Remote

• Program Description : Read A/D value installed at slot No. 6 of Remote 16 Station and output to D/A module installed at slot No. 7. • Function Block Description : ADR4RD : Function Block reading value and status of A/D in Remote. ADMODIFY : User defined function block reading A/D value and making data enable to be output. DAR4WR : Function block outputting data to Remote D/A.

• Program Description : Create initialization condition when special module of Remote not accessed due to power OFF and etc. • Feedback at Row 2 and Row 10 and start initialization function block.

DATA

Page 223: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-12

C : \gmwin30\source\remote_io.src

### ------ I/O Input of Remote Station 16.

### ------ Output Product End Item Loading BCD Counter Input of Remote Station 16 to BCD Indicator.

OUT

EN0

%ID16.0.0

MOVE

EN

IN1 %QD16.2.0

### ------ Output Product Output BCD Counter Input to Output BCD Indicator of Remote Station 16.

Comment

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Comment

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

OUT

EN0

%ID1.4.0

MOVE

EN

IN1 %QD16.3.0

Comment

Page 224: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1-13

C : \gmwin30\source\remote_check.src

Row 19 # ------ Good Remote B-side Connection

Row 18 # ------Good Remote A-side Connection

Row 14 # ------ Remote B-side Connection Communicating

# ------ Remote A-side Connection Communicating

Row 1

Comment

# ------ Status Monitor of Remote Station 16

Row 16

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

Row 6

Row 7

Row 8

Row 9

Comment

Row 10

Row 11

Row 12

Row 13

Row 17

Row 20

Row 21

T100MS

NET_

NO

REMOTEST

STATUS

ERR

RE Q NDR

LOG

ST_N

CH

ST_N

OL

STAT

US

PHY

USR_

D

( S )

REMOTE_ACTIVE

# ------ Remote Connection Operating

REMOTEST.NDR

REMOTEST.USR_D[112]

REMOTEST. USR_D[113]

REMOTEST.ERR

( R )

REMOTE_ACTIVE

REMOTE_ACTIVE

REMOTEST. USR_D[115]

( )

REMOTE_ACH_ACT

REMOTEST] USR_D[115]

REMOTE_ACTIVE

REMOTSET. USR_D[116]

( )

REMOTE_ACH_OK

REMOTSET. USR_D[117]

( )

REMOTE_BCH_ACT

( )

REMOTE_BCH_OK

Row 22

• Program Description : Detect the operation of Remote Station and the status of Redundant communication line and make data enabled to be monitored at next higher system. • Function block Description :

STATUS : Function Block verifying operation status of Remote Station

Page 225: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2-1

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2.1 Basic Function Table This describes the example data of program size and processing speed for basic function.

FB Size (Byte) *1 Library *2 Processing Speed(us) Name Function

IL LD Size (Byte) IL LD *3ABS (int) Absolute Value operation 24 44 - 0.72 1.36 ADD (int,dint) Add 16 36 - 0.48 1.12 ADD (lint) Add 40 60 - 1.72 2.36 AND (word,dword) AND 4 24 - 0.12 0.76 AND (lword) AND 8 28 - 0.24 0.88 DIV (int,dint) Divide 16 36 - 0.48 1.12 DIV (lint) Divide 28 48 - 290 290 EQ (int,dint) ‘Equal’ Comparison 12 32 - 0.36 1.00 LIMIT(int,dint) Upper/Lower Limit 40 60 964 7.2 7.9 MAX (int,dint) Max. 40 60 1120 9.4 10.0 MOVE (lint) Data Copy 0 20 - 0.00 0.64 MUL (int,dint) Multiply 16 36 - 0.48 1.12 MUL (lint) Multiply 28 40 - 310 310 MUX (int,dint) Multiplex 48 68 552 8.4 9.0 MUX (lint) Multiplex 56 76 - 12.0 12.6 ROL Rotate Left 32 52 392 1.80 2.44 SUB (int,dint) Subtract 16 36 - 0.48 1.12 SUB (lint) Subtract 40 60 - 1.72 2.36 BCD_TO_DINT Convert BCD type to DINT type. 4 24 280 10.0 10.6 BCD_TO_INT Convert BCD type to INT type 4 24 136 10.0 10.6 BCD_TO_SINT Convert BCD type to SINT type 4 24 84 10.0 10.6 BYTE_TO_SINT Convert BYTE type to SINT type 0 20 - 0.00 0.64

DATE_TO_STRING Convert DATE type to STRING type

28 48 60 360 360

DINT_TO_INT Convert DINT type to INT type 56 76 - 1.68 2.32 DINT_TO_BCD Convert DINT type to BCD type 4 24 172 17.4 18.0 DT_TO_DATE Convert DT type to DATE type 0 20 - 0 0.64 DT_TO_TOD Convert DT type to TOD type 4 24 2 0.60 1.24 DT_TO_STRING Convert DT type to STRING type 28 48 60 442 442 DWORD_TO_WORD

Convert DWORD type to WORD type

0 20 - 0 0.64

INT_TO_DINT Convert INT type to DINT type 4 24 - 0.12 0.76 INT_TO_BCD Convert INT type to BCD type 4 24 108 6.0 6.6 NUM_TO_STRING(int)

Convert Number to STRING 36 56 312 280 280

SINT_TO_BCD Convert SINT type to BCD type 4 24 84 6.0 6.6

STRING_TO_INT Convert STRING type to INT type

4 24 48 360 360

CONCAT Connect String 48 68 168 31.4 32.0 DELETE Delete String 44 64 328 21.5 22.1

Page 226: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2-2

FB Size(Byte) *1 Processing Speed(us) Name Function

IL LD

Library Size(Byte) *2

IL LD *3EQ(str) ‘Eaual’ Comparision 44 64 752 13.5 14.1 FIND Find String 28 48 228 7.1 7.7 INSERT Insert String 48 68 348 40.9 41.5 LEFT Obtain Left of String 36 56 140 18.6 19.2 LEN Calculate Length of String 4 24 88 6.5 7.1 LIMIT(str) Uppwer/Lower Limit 70 90 964 38.4 39.0 MAX(str) Max. 56 76 1120 19.8 20.4 MID Obtain MID of string 44 64 208 31.6 32.2 REPLACE Replace String 56 76 424 37.3 37.9 RIGHT Obtain RIGHT of string 36 56 220 28.4 29.0 ADD_TIME (time) Add time 32 52 220 3.1 3.7 DIV_TIME (i1=time) Divide time 32 52 436 6.9 7.5

Remarks

*1 program memory size occupied whenever using the function once. *2 program memory size occupied only once though the function used in the program several times *3 IL Program Criteria(Input Variable 2EA, 10 string) # Extendable Function(ADD,MUL, MAX, MIN, MUX,EQ등) depends on two Input Variables. # Character string processing function depends on if its length consisted of 10 characters. • Processing speed of the above functions can be faster according to the version of CPU module.

Page 227: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2-3

A2.2 Basic Function Block Table This shows data example for program/data memory size and processing speed of basic function block.

FB Size (Byte)*1 Processing Speed(us) *4

Name Function IL LD Library Size (Byte) *2

Instance Memory Size

(Byte) *3 IL LD

CTU Count up counter 56 56 120 6 6.4 6.4 CTD Count down Counter 56 56 166 6 6.4 6.4

CTUD Count Up/Down Counter

88 88 196 6 10.4 10.4

TON ON Delay Timer 40 40 248 20 6.2:Run 4.5:Not run

6.2: Run 4.5: Not run

TOF OFF Delay Timer 40 40 288 20 7.7: Run 4.9: Not run

7.7: Run 4.9: Not run

TP Pulse Timer 40 40 312 20 8.1: Run 6.1: Not run

8.1: Run 6.1: Not run

R_TRIG Rising Edge Detection

32 32 24 1 2.6 2.6

F_TRIG Falling Edge Detection

32 32 24 1 2.6 2.6

SR Set Priority Bistable 48 48 32 1 2.9 2.9 RS Reset Priority Bistable 48 48 20 1 2.9 2.9

SEMA System Resource Distribution

48 48 44 1 2.9 2.9

Remarks

*1 program memory size occupied whenever using the function once. *2 program memory size occupied only once though the function used in the program several times

*3 data memory size occupied whenever using the function once. • Processing speed of the above functions can be faster according to the version of CPU module.

A2.3 Function Block for Communication Module

If using communication Redundancy in Redundant System or C-NET Module in Switched Base, use the function block with the same style of communication function block of Single CPU system (GM1, GM2, GM3).

For detailed information of function block, see user’s manual for communication module or communication Redundancy.

Page 228: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2-4

A2.4 Function Block for Special Module

A2.4.1 Function Block in One-sided Operation(Attached at Switched Base) If installing Special Module at Switched Base without Redundant configuration in Redundant System, use the function block with the same style of communication function block of Single CPU system (GM1, GM2, GM3).

For detailed information of function block, see user’s manual for communication module or communication Redundancy.

A2.4.2 Function Block in Redundant of Special Block(Attached at Redundant Base) This describes how to use function block if using Redundancy special module. Existing function block or special function block can be used according to used module. See the following table. For detailed information of Redundancy function block, see user’s manual of applicable special module.

Segment Module Name Initialization Function Block

Control Function Block

G3F-AD4A G3F-AD4B RAD4INI RAD4ARD Analog Input G3F-AD3A RAD3INI RAD3ARD G3F-DA4V G3F-DA4I Same as in Single RDA4AWR

Analog Output G3F-DA3V G3F-DA4I Not supported Not supported

RTD Input G3F-RD3A Same as in Single RRTD3ARD TC Input G3F-TC4A Same as in Single RTC4ARD

Remarks

• If function block running request continues ON, changed to new value every scan and if OFF, keep

existing value. • In Redundant System, prepare initialization function block in Initialization Task Program.

A2.4.3 Function Block When installed at Remote(Installed at Remote Base) If installing Special Module at Remote Base in Redundant System, use the function block with the same style of Remote function block of Single CPU system(GM1, GM2, GM3).

For detailed information of function block, see user’s manual of applicable special module..

Remarks

• If function block running request continues ON, changed to new value every scan and if OFF, keep existing value.

• Remote Initialization Function Block shall be prepared in Scan Program to start Special Module Initialization when Remote restarted during operation.

Page 229: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2-5

A2.5 Immediate I/O Function Block

In Redundant System, use Immediate I/O Function with separate and different style for data synchronization between Redundant CPUs. See the following detailed information of Function.

RDIREC_IN Name GMR GM1 GM2 GM3 GM4 GM6 GM7

Applicability

Function Block Description

Input EN : Function run at 1. BASE : Position No. of base with Input Module installed. SLOT : Position No. of slot at base with Input Module installed. MASK: Designate BIT not updated among WORD data to update input Output ENO : If no error, output 1. OUT : If Input Data Update completed, output 1.

Function

Function RDIREC_IN(Input Data Immediate Update); If EN set to 1 during scanning, read WORD data designated at CH among data of designated Input Module and update and enter only BIT data not masked(1) into Input Image Area.

Function RDIREC_IN is used to update ON/OFF statue of Input (%I) during scanning. Because scan sync. batch processing generally performed Input Data Read as a package after a completion

of scan program, Input Data Update will be disabled from external during 1 scanning. If using Function DIREC_IW, Input Update can be done during programming. For ex. of program, see ‘DIREC_IN’ function of ‘GLOFA-GM Command Glossary.

BOOLUSINTUSINTUSINTWORD

EN

BASE SLOT CH MASK

ENOOUT

BOOL BOOL

RDIREC_IN

Input Data Immediate Update (WORD)

Page 230: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2-6

RDIREC_O Name GMR GM1 GM2 GM3 GM4 GM6 GM7

Applicability

Function Block Description

Input EN : Function run at 1. BASE : Position No. of base with Output Module installed. SLOT : Position No. of slot at base with Output Module installed. CH : WORD unit channel designation of data to update output. MASK: Designate BIT not updated among WORD data to update output Output ENO : If no error, output 1. OUT : If Input Data Update completed, output 1.

Function

Function RDIREC_O(Output Data Immediate Update); If EN set to 1 during scanning, read WORD 16 outputs designated by CH among data of Output Modules designated by BASE, SLOT and update and then output

only BIT data not masked(1) into Output Image Area.

Function RDIREC_O is used to update ON/OFF statue of Output (%Q) during scanning. Because scan sync. batch processing generally performed Output Data Write as a package after a completion of scan program, Output Data Update will be disabled from external during 1 scanning. If using Function RDIREC_O, Output Update can be done during programming.

For ex. of program, see ‘DIREC_O’ function of ‘GLOFA-GM Command Glossary.

BOOLUSINTUSINTUSINTWORD

EN

BASE SLOT CH MASK

ENOOUT

BOOL BOOL

RDIREC_O

Output Data Immediate Update (Unit; WORD)

Page 231: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

A3-1

I/O Contact Definition Table Input( ) / Output( )

Variable Name Position Function Variable Name Position Function

Base Slot Contact Module Type Base Slot Contact Module Type

0 16

1 17

2 18

3 19

4 20

5 21

6 22

7 23

8 24

9 25

10 26

11 27

12 28

13 29

14 39

15 31

Page 232: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

A3-2

I/O Contact Definition Table Input( ) / Output( )

Variable Name Position Function Variable Name Position Function

Page 233: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

A3-3

Local Variable Definition Table Program Block Name: Basic/Array Data( ), Function Block Instance( )

Variable Name Data Type Data Kind*1 Default Memory Assigned Function

*1 Basic/Array Variable: Local(VAR), Constant(VAR_CONSTANT), Retain(VAR_RETAIN), External(VAR_EXTERNAL) Function Block Instance: Local(VAR), Retain(VAR_RETAIN), External(VAR_EXTERNAL)

Page 234: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

A3-4

Global Variable Definition Table Resource( O )/Configuration( ) Name: Basic/Array Data( ), Function Block Instance( )

Variable Name Data Type Data Kind*1 Default Memory Assigned Function

*1 Basic/Array Variable: Standard(VAR_GLOVAL), Constant(VAR_GLOVAL_CONSTANT), Retain(VAR_GLOVAL_RETAIN) Function Block Instance: Standard(VAR_GLOBAL), Retain(VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN)

Page 235: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Warranty 1. Term of warranty

LGIS provides an 18-month-warranty from the date of production. 2. Range of warranty

For troubles within the term of warranty, LGIS will replace the entire PLC or repair the troubled parts free of charge except the following cases. (1) The troubles caused by improper condition, environment or treatment. (2) The troubles caused by external devices. (3) The troubles caused by remodeling or repairing based on user’s own discretion. (4) The troubles caused by improper usage of the product. (5) The troubles caused by the reason which exceeded the expectation from science and technology level

when LGIS produced the product. (6) The troubles caused by natural disaster.

3. This warranty is limited to the PLC itself only. It is not valid for the whole system which the PLC is attached to.

Page 236: LG Programmable Logic Controller - LSIS GMR... · LG Programmable Logic Controller Redundancy System GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB User’s Manual GLOFA-GM LG Industrial Systems

Head Office

LG Twin Towers East Bldg. 9th Floor, 20, Yoido-Dong Youngdungpo-Gu, Seoul 150-721, KOREA

Domestic Sales Team PLC sales team (Seoul)

TEL : +82-2-3777-4620~34 FAX : +82-2-3777-4622 Busan sales team

TEL : +82-51-310-6855~9 FAX : +82-51-515-0406 Deagu sales team

TEL : +82-53-603-7740~5 FAX : +82-53-603-7788 Gwangju sales team

TEL : +82-62-510-1885~91 FAX : +82-62-526-3262 Deajeon sales team

TEL : +82-42-480-8919-20 FAX : +82-42-489-8672

Overseas Sales Team PLC sales team

TEL : +82-2-3777-4640~7 FAX : +82-2-3777-4648

Web Site http://www.lgis.co.kr (Korean) http://www.lgis.com (English)

Overseas Branches USA New Jersey Branch TEL : +1-201-816-2985 China Beijing Branch TEL : +86-10-6462-3256

Shanghai Branch TEL : +86-21-5308-3582 Japan Tokyo Branch TEL : +81-3-3582-9128 Indonesia Jakarta Branch TEL : +62-21-897-4311 Vietnam Hanoi Branch TEL : +84-4-882-0222

LG constantly endeavors to improve our products so that information in this manual is subjected to change without

notice.